iij'r’feM tirtjpi k* ;
Professor STALKER’S WORKS.
In Crown Svo, Large Type Edition, 3 s. 6 d.;
Cheaper Edition , is. 6d.
THE LIFE OF JESUS CHRIST.
By Professor James Stalker, D.D.
“No work since ‘ Ecce Homo ’ has at all approached this
in succinct, clear-cut, and incisive criticism on Christ as He
appeared to those who believed on Him.”— Literary World.
“ Even with all our modern works on this exhaustless
theme, from Neander to Farrar and Geikie, there is none
which occupies the ground of Dr Stalker’s,
whether any one popular work so im
represents Jesus to the mind.”—
/ * *''' j
Uniform with the
Mm
S\2>
By Professor Jam
THE LIFE
“ Surpassingly excellent. ... Dr Stalker gives a masterly
miniature, and thousands will see more of Paul in it than
in the life-sized portraits. . . . We have not seen a hand¬
book more completely to our mind.”—C. H. Spurgeon in
Sword and Trowel.
“ A gem of sacred biography.”— Christian Leader.
“ We cannot speak too highly of the way in which our
author has handled his material. ... Dr Stalker, as in his
‘ Life of Christ,’ becomes thoroughly original in his treatment,
and we have a feeling that what we are reading is not only
new, but true.”— Ecclesiastical Gazette.
Edinburgh : T. & T. CLARK, 38 George Street.
B. H. BLACKWELL Ltd.
Booksellers
48-51 BBOAD STREET
Oxford, England
Bible Class primers.
EDITED BY PRINCIPAL SALMOND, D.D., ABERDEEN.
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
A PLAN OF STUDY
IN THREE PARTS,
I.--The Kingdom in Israel.
IL—The Kingdom in the Synoptic Sayings of Jesus
III,—The Kingdom in Apostolic Times.
BY
F. HERBERT STEAD, M.A.,
AUTHOR OF “ A HANDBOOK ON YOUNG PEOPLE’S GUILDS ”
$art I.—'THE KINGDOM IN ISRAEL.
(BMnbttrglt:
T. & T. CLARK, 38 GEORGE STREET.
LONDON : SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, HAMILTON, KENT & CO. (Ltd.)
£03
PREFACE.
Co-operative study on a concerted plan seems to
me to be one of the best methods a Bible Class
can follow. It secures the systematic exposition
of the lecture, without its monotony. It possesses
the dialectical interest of the debating society
without its wordy combativeness. It adds the
charm of comradeship to the joy of definite and
progressive pursuit of knowledge. It stimulates
the individuality of the learner while utilizing to the
full the trained leadership of the teacher. It is the
method therefore contemplated in the following
pages.
At the beginning of the Session, or at convenient
stages in the course of study, a member should be
appointed, for every day on which discussion takes
place, to introduce the discussion by a short speech
or paper. The programme thus arranged should be
in the hands of every member in print or writing.
At the close of each hour should be announced the
section or sections, or portions of Scripture, to be
considered at the next meeting, along with the
subject for discussion.
In preparation for the Class, members are re¬
quested—
(i) Carefully to read the section or sections for the next
meeting.
6
PREFACE.
(2) To look up every passage of Scripture cited therein.
(3) To get “ the key-text ” off by heart.
(4) To think over “ the topic for discussion ”—the
introducer will of course have to get his speech or paper
ready, and
(5) To keep in mind “ the request.”
The order in Class will vary, as the course of
study advances. For Part I. the following order
may be employed :—
Short Prayer by any member (in which the request is
not forgotten).
The Teacher explains and connects the Scripture
referred to in the sections for the evening.
Asks and answers questions thereon.
Describes (when it occurs) the “ Focal Picture or
Scene,” or where it has been sketched, exhibits the
sketch.
Then calls on the member appointed to introduce “the
topic for discussion.”
Discussion.
Benediction.
For other suggestions see my Handbook on Young
People's Guilds (published by the Congregational Union
of England and Wales, Memorial Hall, Farringdon Street,
London, E.C.), pages 40 ff.
The Plan of Study falls naturally into three parts,
as it traces the development of the Kingdom of
God (1) in Israel, (2) in the Sayings and Doings of
Jesus, and (3) in Apostolic times. Each of these
parts is sufficient to occupy a winter’s session of the
Class, and is therefore published separately. For
PREFACE.
7
private study, permanent reference and other pur¬
poses, the three parts are also combined in one
volume.
I ought to mention that most of these outlines and
suggestions have stood the test of practice. Sub¬
stantially the same methods were followed by my
Bible Class at Gallowtree Gate Church, Leicester,
in the years 1887-1889, when we studied together
the main part of §§ 1-74.
To the Young People who then worked with me,
and whose co-operation forms one of my happiest
memories, I gratefully inscribe this little book.
F. HERBERT STEAD.
CONTENTS.
PaGS
Preface : Method of Study ..... 5
Introduction : The Theme of the Gospel,
§§ i» 2.13-15
aHrst:
CHE KINGDOM OF GOD IN ISRAEL, §§ 3-20 . 16-49
Moses the Founder, § 3. The Judges or early
Kings, §4. David the Typical King, § 5.
The Prophets, § 6-20 : put a stop to empire,
§§ 6, 7. The New (Literary) Prophecy, § 8.
(1.) The Assyrian Period, §§ 9-13 .... 27-35
Amos, the Prophet of Justice, § 9. Hosea, the
Prophet of Mercy, § 10. Isaiah, the Prophet of
Faith, §§ 11, 12. The New-Found Law-Book,
§ 13 -
(2.) The Chaldean Period, §§ 14-17 .... 38-43
Jeremiah, the Prophet of Individual Religion,
§§ 14, 15. Ezekiel, the Prophet of Regeneration,
§ 16. The Problem of the Exile (“Job”),
§ 17 -
(30 The Medo-Persian Period, §§ 18, 19 . . . 45-48
The Prophecy of Redemption (Isa. 40-66). The
Prophecy of Resurrection (Isa. 24-27).
Review of the Prophetic Ideal, § 20
49
10
CONTENTS.
The Reign of the Written Law, §§ 21-29 •
Principles of the Law, § 22. The Hymnals of the
Jews, §§ 23, 24. The Greek Yoke Broken,
§ 25. The Vision of Humanity Regnant, § 26.
The Rind and Pith of the Law, § 27. Deepen¬
ing Expectancy, § 28.
Review of the Post-Prophetic Period, § 29 . ,
Closing Survey of Part First, § 30 .
Ipart SecottD:
THE KINGDOM IN THE SYNOPTIC SAYINGS
of Jesus, §§ 31-74. .
Sources and Method, § 31. The Gradual Unfold¬
ing, § 32.
Collective Statement, §§ 33-73
Fulfilment and Repeal, § 33.
A. The God whose is the Kingdom, §§ 34-39 .
The Supreme Unity, § 34. The Creator and
Disposer, § 35. The God of Revelation, § 36.
The All-Perfect Father, § 37. The Father in
His Family, § 38. The Dread Awarder, § 39.
B . The Subjects of the Kingdom, §§ 40-44
Who may be Subjects, § 40. Relation of Subjects
to God (Religion), § 41. Relation of Subjects to
each other (Morality), § 42. The Law of the
Brotherhood, § 43. Its Unity, § 44.
C. The Christ, §§ 45-52.
His Titles, § 45. “The Son of Man,” § 46. The
Anointed Ruler, § 47. His General Relation to
the Kingdom, § 48. His Relation to the Father,
§ 49. His Relation to the Subjects, § 50. The
Death of the Christ, § 51. Summary of C , § 52.
PAGE
52-75
75
77
7*63
13- 62
14- 19
19-29
30-47
CONTENTS.
tt
D. When and How the Kingdom Comes, §§ 53-57 .
The Present Kingdom, § 53. The Future
Kingdom, § 54. The Law of Growth (or
Evolution), § 55. The Process of Growth, § 56.
The Means of Growth, § 57.
E. Where the Kingdom comes, §§ 58-66 .
Here as yonder, § 58. In Nature, § 59. In Man:
his Body, § 60. His worldly goods, § 61. The
Home, § 62. The State, § 63. The Heart of
Man, § 64. The Realm of “Saving Health,”
§ 65, Its various reception, § 66.
F. The LAST THINGS, §§ 67-73.
Death no bar to Life, § 67. The Life beyond
Death, § 68. The Day of Judgment, § 69.
Whom the Kingdom excludes, § 70. Whom it
receives, § 71. The Doom, § 72. The Meed,
§ 73 -
Summary of Synoptic Sayings : What is the
Gospel as Jesus preached it? § 74 .
Ipart abftD:
THE KINGDOM IN APOSTOLIC TIMES,
§§ 75-97 .
The Kingdom as actual product, § 75. The
Kingdom as Church, § 76. The Forty Years’
Transition, § 77. The Message of the First
Heralds, § 78. On the Epistles, § 79.
A. The Kingdom according to Paul, §§ 80-90 .
The Vital Fact, § 80. The Social Organism,
§ 81. The Old Man and the New, § 82. The
Death-Birth, § 83. Transcorporation, § 84.
PAGE
48-50
51-57
58-62
63.78
7-66
21-47
12
CONTENTS.
PAGE
The Home of the Adopted, § 85. The Realm
of the Justified, § 86. The Synoptic Idea in
Paul, § 87. In whom all things consist, § 88.
The Law of the Spirit of Life, § 89. The
Several Spheres, § 90.
B. The Kingdom according to other New Testament
writers, §§ 91-96.47-65
The Epistle of Hope (1 Peter), § 91. The Epistle
of Practical Wisdom (James), § 92. The
Apology of the Transition (Hebrews), § 93.
The Vision of the Kingdom Triumphant (Rev.),
§ 94. The Epistle of Love (1 John), § 95. The
Last Memoirs of the Christ (John), § 96.
Finale, § 97.. , . 65, 66
BppenMj 3v
How Later Thinkers put it ... * , , 67
Bppenfctj 3$.
The Witness of Imperial History to the Kingdom » 8c
THE KINGDOM OF GOD
INTRODUCTION.
§ 1. Its place in the Religion of Jesus.
We believe in Jesus. He is our Master and
Teacher. For us His word is decisive. From the
systems of the schools and the traditions of the
fathers and the fashion of the pulpit we turn to His
teaching, believing it to be the very speech of God.
We come with open hearts and frank eagerness to
learn from Him. We have heard of His Gospel,
and we wish to know from His lips what that
Gospel is. We will abide by what He tells us.
What is central to His thought shall be central to
ours.
What, then, in His own words, is His Gospel?
Key-Text. Jesus came into Galilee , preaching the
Gospel of God , and saying , The time is fulfilled\
and the Kingdom of God is at hand: repent ye,
and believe in the Gospel .—Mark i. 14, 15.
(Matt. iv. 17.)
14
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
The Kingdom of God is the theme of the Good
Tidings (Gospel) which Jesus Himself preached.
According to Mark, which is the shortest and
probably the earliest of the Gospels we possess,
the Kingdom is, from first (i. 15) to last (xiv. 25 ;
cf. Acts i. 3), the burden of Jesus’ teaching.
So Luke and Matthew (which latter prefers the
phrase Kingdom of Heaven) passim. Express
statements are Luke iv. 43 ; viii. 1 ; Matt. iv. 23 ;
ix. 35 ; Luke ix. 11.
The parables mostly set forth what “ the King¬
dom of God is like.”
The Kingdom was also that which Jesus bade His
disciples preach.—Luke ix. 2 ; Matt. ix. 7 :
Luke ix. 60 ; x. 9, 11 ; Matt. xxiv. 14.
After His departure, it was still the theme of the
disciples’ preaching ; instance—Philip, Acts
viii. 12, and Paul, Acts xiv. 22 ; xix. 8 ; xx. 25 ;
xxviii. 23, 31.
Thus, according to Jesus and His earliest followers,
evangelical preaching is preaching the Kingdom
of God.
The Chief Quest, or Highest Good (which
Greek sages had variously defined as know¬
ledge, or pleasure, or imperturbability) is de¬
clared by Jesus to be the Kingdom of God.—
Luke xii. 31 ; Matt. vi. 33.
TOPIC for discussion : Does the Kingdom of God
hold the same place in ordinary Christian
thought as it had in the preaching of Jesus ?
Request : For a whole-hearted and reverent love
of truth.—Psalm lxxxvi. n.
ITS ROOTS IN THE PAST.
15
§ 2. Its Roots in the Past.
The Kingdom was spoken of by Jesus and His
disciples as a theme not quite strange or new,
but as something already familiar to the people’s
thought. The idea was in some measure
common to Him and to them. How had they
come by it ?
“ The time is fulfilled ” (Mark i. 15) implied an
earlier period of preparation and expectation.
This studied will prepare our minds to look for
the true fulfilment.
“ The Kingdom of God shall be taken away from
you ” (Matt. xxi. 43) pointed to its having been
in some way with the “nation ” of Israel.
To understand Jesus’ thought we must therefore
“dig down, the old unbury.” We cannot start
off-hand with His sayings about the Kingdom.
He loyally links His thought with what had
gone before (Matt. v. 17). To slight or under¬
rate His past is to be untrue to Him. The
story that led up to Him is part of His story.
The way to come at His truth is to trace the
way His truth, slowly through the ages, came
at last to Him.
16
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
FIRST PART.
THE KINGDOM OF GOD IN ISRAEL.
The Social Ideal foreshadowed in the
National State.
§ 3. Moses the Founder.
Key-Text. He made known His ways unto Moses ,
His doings unto the children of Israel. _
Psalm ciii. 7.
“The children of Israel” existed as tribes or clans
before his time, but as a nation Israel began to
be with Moses.
He brought in a new idea of God, marked by the
new name Yahweh (commonly, but incorrectly,
Jehovah).—Exodus iii. 13, 15; vi. 3.
He made the demand, said to be utterly unique, of
monolatry (worship of One only)—that those
who worshipped Yahweh should worship none
beside.—Exodus xxxiv. 14 ; xx. 3.
(Distinguish between Monolatry and Monotheism.)
His own personality stands out, humble, humane
(Numbers xii. 3 ; Exodus iii. 11 ; iv. jo), yet, to
this day, powerful.
By means of idea, demand, personality—all attested
in the deed of deliverance from Egypt—the
religion of Israel was established, and became
the formative centre of the national life.
This nation owns its God as its Lord or Over-lord,
MOSES THE FOUNDER.
17
its King; like other Semites (cf Molech,
Milcom = king, of the Ammonites, Malk = king,
Melkart = city king, of the Phoenicians). And
so the nation is the people of Jehovah.
Moses is Jehovah’s deputy or vicegerent.—Exodus
xviii. 15, 16.
[Eminent Chiistian scholars dispute how much or how
little of the story and of “ the Law of Moses,” as we
now have them in the “books of Moses,” came im¬
mediately from him. We need not now try to join in
the controversy. Without touching on the vexed ques¬
tion, When were the various laws written ? we may
note their bearing on the Kingdom at the periods
when, according to almost all critics, they were
adopted or re-adopted by the people. Our chief con¬
cern with Moses is to notice that he was reformer of
the faith, and so founder of the nation, of Israel.
We hasten over his and following periods until we
reach the reign of David, whence the historic idea
of the Kingdom properly dates.]
Thus we are reminded that from the first the life of
the nation of Israel was the instrument of
Divine revelation.
Topic to be discussed : How far national life to¬
day is a means whereby God reveals Himself;
or the true relation between religion and
politics.
Request : For an open mind in the study of
Scripture.—Luke xxiv. 44, 45,
I
B
i8
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
§ 4. Ttie Judges, or Early Kings.
Key-Text. The leaders took the lead in Israel;
the people offered themselves willingly .—Judges
v. 2.
The clans of Israel, as they slowly crept over the
the land of Canaan (Ex. xxiii. 29, 30), and as
they gradually turned from merely keeping
flocks and herds to growing also corn and fruit,
were very loosely connected. The chief tie
which bound them to one another was their
religion.
Yet the exclusive unity of worship (“ No other
God/’ Ex. xxxiv. 14) tended to strengthen and
organize the political unity. Often, indeed,
this religious influence seemed to sink into
abeyance, but ever and again its increasing
might was thrust into view by the two-fold
pressure of an enemy from without, and £
leader from within.
(Compare and distinguish Hebrew judge and Roman
dictator.)
In this unifying process we mark three great steps
ere we reach the climax.
Deborah (in Issachar) summons the clans, in the
name of Jehovah, to victorious revolt against
the oppressive Sisera and his Canaanites
(Judges v.).
Gideon (of Manasseh) gathers the clans in the
name of Jehovah, and beats back the invading
Midianites (Judges vi.—viii.). The sway of his
house ended with his usurping son, Abimelech
(Judges ix.).
DAVID , THE TYPICAL KING.
19
The advance of the Philistines from the South-West
needed something more to check it than a
sudden levy of the clans now and then, under
a chance leader. Israel must not merely at
times become one, but must abide one, under
the same head. So Monolatry leads to
Monarchy. In the name of Jehovah Samuel
anoints
Saul (of Benjamin) as King over Israel (1 Sam. x. 1).
Saul was thus (1 Sam. xxiv. 6-10; xxvi. 9)
Jehovah’s Anointed (Messiah) or the Lord’s
CHRIST (for so the Hebrew words are trans¬
lated when they are turned into the Greek ol
the Old and New Testaments).
But by the house of Saul was not wrought the
unity or even the liberty of Israel.
Topic to be discussed : The place of woman in
national life ( cf Deborah and Joan of Arc).
Request : For a succession of religious leaders
who shall unite the now loosely-linked peoples
of the English tongue.
§ 5 . David, the Typical King. About 1000 b.c,
Key-Text. David perceived that the Lord had
established him King over Israel, and that He
had exalted his Kingdom for His people Israel’s
sake. —2 Sam. v. 12.
On the death of Saul, David (then a vassal of the
Philistines) became King ot Judah (2 Sam. ii. 4,
over a district not larger than Cambridgeshire),
and, on the death of Ish-baal, he was elected
20
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
King of Israel (2 Sam. v. 3, over a region of
the size of Wales). All Israel is thus unified
(2 Sam. viii. 15).
Jerusalem, hitherto not Israelitish, he seized and
made his capital (2 Sam. v. 6-9).
He extended his sway over neighbouring nations
until it reached from the Euphrates to Egypt
(2 Sam. viii. ; 1 Kings iv. 21-24— a realm
scarcely as big as England). This may fairly,
in distinction from the petty kingdoms within it
and without, be called the Empire of Israel.
Those great deeds and a character of large compass
and intensity, crowned by devoted piety, marked
David a man after Jehovah’s own heart (1 Sam.
xiii. 14), and made him the ideal King of the
later literature of Israel.
Thus was stamped upon history in rough and im¬
perfect miniature
THE NATIONAL TYPE OF THE KINGDOM OF GOD ;
for in David’s days we see
The Kingdom of Jehovah, including all Israel
and many other nations, centred in Jeru¬
salem and ruled by a King of the House
of David, who is Jehovah’s Anointed
(Messiah) or the Lord’s CHRIST (2 Sam.
xix. 21).
This is the outline of the later Social Ideal.
Topic to be discussed : The character of David, as
warrior,outlaw, statesman, judge,as bard, friend,
foe, father, and as a man of God,—What is the
secret of it all ?
The prophets put a stop to empire. 21
Request : That our lives may be such as to raise
the ideals of those who come after us.
§ 6. The Prophets put a Stop to Empire.
Key-Text. I have hewed them by the prophets ; I
have slam them by the words of My mouth .—
Hosea vi. 5.
The Hebrew word for prophet is of uncertain origin,
but is generally used to mean God’s spokesman.
Prophecy came much to the fore in the time of
Samuel, and was at first a thing of visions,
ecstasy, and tumult. (1 Sam. ix. 9 ; x. \off. ;
xix. 20-24.) Prophets grew in boldness and in
power, until Nathan dared to rebuke the king
and lived. (2 Sam. xii. 7-15.)
SOLOMON set up a gorgeous Imperialism. He
parcelled out his empire heedless of tribal
borders. (1 Kings iv. 7 Jf.)
He centralized power and wealth and magnifi¬
cence in the new Capital. (1 Kings iv.—x.)
He formed alliances, by marriage and other¬
wise, with many foreign peoples. (1 Kings iii.
1 ; ix. 27 ; x. 22-29; xi. I_ 3-)
He exacted forced labour, not only from Canaan-
ites (1 Kings ix. 21), but from Israelites (v.
13-18.)
Solomon was also Imperialist in religion. He built
a Temple of Phoenician art (vii. 13, 14), where
he sought to centralize the national worship
(v.—viii.). He set up high places for the gods of
his allies and of subject peoples (xi. 1-8). His
22
THE KINGDOM OE GOD.
was a heavy yoke (xii. 4). His policy threat¬
ened liberty and religion.
Some scholars suppose that the code of laws found in
Exodus xx. 22— xxiii., was put together about this
time. In any case, the northern tribesmen would
contrast with Solomon’s Phoenician temple the simple
ways of their early religion, which are expressed in
Exodus xx. 24-26.
Ahijah, a prophet of Jehovah, roused Jeroboam to
revolt (1 Kings xi. 29). Jehovah raised up
other adversaries (xi. 14-25). Conquered peoples
fell away (xi. 24, 25). The northern tribes flung
off the Imperial yoke (xii. 1-20). Only Judah
remained loyal.
Thus the Davidic empire was destroyed, but the
religion was saved.
In Northern Israel, which was now the stronger
kingdom, the same story was re-told.
Omri, a minor David, fixed his capital in Samaria
(xvi. 24), and extended his sway over Moab
(Moabitish stone) and his fame to Assyria
(Assyrian Inscriptions). -
Ahab, a northern Solomon, was practical Suzerain
of Judah (xxii. 4), and was in close alliance with
Zidon (xvi. 31).
This brilliant Imperialism threatened the exclusive
purity of Jehovah’s worship (xvi. 32;xviii. 21), and,
though supported by many prophets, speaking
in the name of Jehovah (xxii. 6-24),
was sternly opposed by
THE PROPHE TS PUT A STOP TO EMPIRE. 23
Elijah (i Kings xviii., xix., xxi.; 2 Kings i.),
Micaiah (1 Kings xxii.),
Elisha (1 Kings xix. 16; 2 Kings ix. 3), the
“ schools ” or “ guilds ” or “ sons” of the prophets
(Ibid.), and their following (1 Kings xix. 18).
It was finally, along with the Omri dynasty, extir¬
pated by Jehu (2 Kings ix., x.).
Empire was a second time destroyed : the Kingdom
must be, not Jehovah’s along with other gods—
whether the Pantheon of Solomon or the
Phoenician Baal of Ahab—but Jehovah’s alone.
The history of Israel not seldom presents us with
scenes which focus into a dramatic situation the
significance of a century or of an epoch. These we
may therefore call “Focal.” The rough jottings
here supplied may be worked up by the Teacher into
a graphic word-picture, or members of the class who
possess artistic talent may develop a sketch in chalks
or colours for exhibition to the Class.
Focal Picture : The scene in Naboth’s vineyard
(1 Kings xxi. 17-24 ; 2 Kings ix. 25). Elijah in
his rough hair mantle (2 Kings i. 8) suddenly
appearing before Ahab. The King in his
chariot inspecting the estate he has stolen.
Behind him in the same, or a closely following
chariot, Jehu, son of Nimshi, with his captain,
Bidkar,—the man destined to execute the doom
uttered by the prophet.
Here is the outline for a first-class historical painting.
Little imagination is needed to fill in the details in a
way suggestive of the significance of the occasion.
E.g., A robe of Phoenician purple worn by Ahab
would recall his dabbling in Phoenician idolatry.
24
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Topic for discussion : “ The Divine right of insur¬
rection is there such a thing ? What light is
thrown on the question by Ahijah and Elijah ?
Request : That in doing God’s work we may fear
“the Sovereign People” as little as Elijah
feared the King.
§ 7. The Kingdom of the World, and the Kingdom of
Jehovah.
The conception of the known world as a single
lealm is one of the greatest ideas of history.
It had been cherished perhaps by the Hittites and
by the Egyptians.
Might it have fired the ambition of Solomon ?
On the summit of the Davidic Empire, Israel (as
Jesus afterwards, Matt. iv. 8 ff.) caught a glimpse
of the possible possession of “ all the kingdoms
of the world, and the glory of them ”; but re¬
fused to accept it at the price of parting with
the purity of his religious ideal.
The answer which repelled the temptation and
renounced immediate empire, was, as later,
(Key-Text.) Thou shalt wo?'ship Jehovah thy God ’
and Him only shalt thou serve .—Matt. iv. io.
The world empire passed into other hands,
Assyrian till 604 B.C.,
Chaldean till 538,
Medo-Persian till 333,
Grecian till 200 B.C., and then
Roman.
But Israel, ever faithful to his religion first, never
gave up his Imperial hope.
THE NEW {LITERARY) PROPHECY. 25
His later history is the working out of these two
ideas.
Topic for discussion : Empire and national holiness
—how far compatible to-day ?
Request : That we may ever give up might for
right and look to right for might.
§ 8. The New (literary) Prophecy.
Key-Text. Amos said\ I am no prophet , neither
am I one of the sons of the prophets, but Jehovah
said unto me, Go prophesy !—Amos vii. 14, 15.
Under the dynasty of Jehu appeared some of the
first prophetic writings that we possess. They
marked the rise of a new kind of inspired
statesman or agitator.
The old prophets had opposed empire and foreign
alliance; the new denounced ruin, more or less
complete, to the home-State itself.
The old kept together in guilds and companies ;
the new were often unattached.
The old were members of an official “order,” the
new were unofficial and, save by Jehovah,
unauthorized.
The old spoke ; the new both spoke and wrote.
Their placards (Isa. viii. 1 ; xxx. 8), broadsheets
and pamphlets (Isa. viii. 16; Jer. xxxvi., &c.)
may be said to mark the inspired beginning of
Religious Journalism.
Their writings form the best witness of their times,
and are thus superior to records written at a
later date.
They are, therefore, the point from which to start
26
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
in any inquiry into the course of Old Testa¬
ment history and legislation.
We learn their ideal of the Divine Commonwealth
by noting
The sins they denounced,
The virtues they commended, and
Their expectations of the future."
The outward occasion of their prophecies was the
approach of a world-empire which boded over¬
throw to the petty states of Palestine and
neighbouring lands.
They may be grouped according to the world-
empire they heralded, Assyrian, Chaldean,
Medo-Persian.
The Assyrian period began for Israel in the ninth
century, when the power centred in Nineveh
was advancing Westward and weakening Syria.
Topic for discussion : The true preacher or the
true journalist,—which more nearly answers to
the idea of prophet ?
Request : That, whether through press or pulpit,
men may speak from God, being moved by the
Holy Spirit.—i Pet. iv. u ; 2 Pet. i. 21.
* Provided with this clue, members of the Class may now
be told off, each to read a certain prophet of the period and
to report to the Class the gist of what the prophet unfolded of
the Kingdom of God. This, with comments from the
Teacher, may take the place of his usual connective and
explanatory remarks.
^nu,]
AMOS, THE PROPHET OF JUSTICE . 27
I.—The Assyrian Period.
§ 9. Amos, the Prophet of Justice. Eighth century b.c.
Key-Text. Hate the evil and love the good , and
establish judgment in the gate j it may be that
Jehovah the God oj Hosts will be gracious unto
the remna?it ojJoseph .—Amos v. 15.
[In preparing for Class, first read this paragraph. Then
read the Book of Amos through without a break. It
contains only from three to four thousand words, or
less than three columns of the London Times. Then
go over this paragraph again, looking up every
passage cited.]
Amos, the champion of the down-trodden peasantry
(vii. 14),
denounces the prevalent perversion of public
justice (ii. 6, 8 ; v. 7, 10, 12; vi. 12), the dis¬
honesty and extortion and oppression practised
upon the poor (ii. 7 ; iii. 9; iv. 1 ; v. 11 ; viii.
4> 5> 6)>
the luxury and selfishness of the rich (iii. 10-12;
iv. 1 ; vi. 1-8),
and the religiousness combined with those vices
(v. 5, 18, 21-23).
He demands justice, not sacrifice or pilgrimage
or noisy adoration (v. 5, 14, 15, 21-25).
He threatens “captivity beyond Damascus”
(i.e., in Assyria, v. 27), and dooms “all the
sinners ” to the sword (ix. 10).
Thus we learn that—
The Kingdom of God must be righteous, though the
kingdom of Israel perish (iii. 1, 2). On the
28
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
return from captivity of a sifted “ remnant”
that survive, the Kingdom of God will appear
as
The re-established “tabernacle of David”
(Davidic Empire),
comprising, as of old, a united Israel and
subject nations (ix. 8-12), and
ensuring for the people rural abundance with
fixity of tenure (ix. 13-15). Cf Zech. xiii. 7-9.
Focal Picture: The scene at Bethel (Amos vii.
12-17).
The royal sanctuary (vii. 13), The sacred stone
erected as a pillar (Gen. xxviii. 22). The altars
(Amos iii. 14). The calves (symbols of Jehovah.
Hos. x. 5). The pilgrims (Amos iv. 4 ; v. 5).
The sacrifices (v. 22). “ The noise of songs/'
“ the melody of viols” (v. 23).
The sudden irruption of the herdmen of Tekoa
(vii. 14).
Amaziah, the priest of the royal sanctuary (vii. 10),
lesenting the intrusion, sneeringly attributing
it to commercial motives (vii. 12).
The official Priest facing the unofficial Prophet.
The one the royal favourite, the State-functionary ;
the other, the poor champion of the poor and
oppressed, the resolute Nonconformist.
The scornful menace of the one met by indignant
doom from the other.
A perennially significant contrast, demanding the skill of
a great historical painter.
Topic for discussion : If Amos had come as a
docker in the East-end of London, or a High-
HOSE A, THE PROPHET OF MERCY. 29
land crofter, or an Irish cottier, what would be
his message to us to-day ?
Request : For a deadly hatred of wrong. —Mark
ix. 42-49.
§ 10. Hosea, the Prophet of Mercy. Eighth century b.c.
Key-Text. I desire mercy and not sacrificej and
the knowledge of God more than burnt offerings.
—Hosea vi. 6.
The tragedy of Hosea’s home life (i., iii.) was, he
believes, designed of God to show that
Jehovah is loving husband to unfaithful Israel and
father to the misguided children of Israel.
This idea rules all his teaching.
Hence comes his thought of
Covenant or troth-plight (vi. 7 ; viii, 1), of
Kindness (mercy, or grace, or piety,—the Hebrew
Hesedh meaning the spirit of kinship — i.e.,
kindness between men or between God and
man), and of
Knowledge of God, or intimacy with Jehovah.
So he most strongly denounces direct disloyalty to
God (ii., iii.), as shown in estrangement from
Him (iv. 6), forgetfulness (xiii. 6), fickleness
(vi. 4; vii. 11), disobedience (viii. 1, 2), ingrati¬
tude (ii. 8 ; xi. 1-7 ; xii. 9-10 ; xiii. 4-7), image-
worship (x. 12; viii. 4; xiii. 2; x. 5 ; viii. 5-6;
iv. 12 ; xiv. 3 ; ii. 16), and treacherous desertion
(ii. 5 ; v. 7).
But he also warmly condemns offences against
morality; murder and robbery (i. 4; iv. 2 ;
30
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
v. 2; vi. 9), cheating and falsehood (iv. 2 ;
xii. 7 ; x. 4; vii. 1 ; iv. 1), and, as most pre¬
valent,
drunkenness and impurity (iv. 2, 11, 12, 18,
v. 4 ; vi. 9, 10 ; &c.).
His chief plea is for a return to intimacy with God,
for covenant-renewal, kindness, and knowledge
of God (iii. 5 ; v. 15 ff. ; vi. 6 ; vii. 10 ; x. 12 ;
xi. 11 ; xii. 6 ; xiv. 1 ff).
So the Kingdom of God is one of kindness, of end
less love to the guilty (xi. 1-9), of pardon to the
penitent (xiv. 4). It shall appear after Exile
(ix. 3, 17) as the Davidic kingdom (iii. 5) unit
ing Israel and Judah (i. 11) in righteousnes.
and kindness (ii. 19 ; x. 12), in peace (ii. 18, cj
Zech. ix. 9, 10) and plenty (ii. 22) and knowledge
of God (ii. 20).
Topic for discussion : (1) The connection and con
trast between Amos and Hosea ( cf. Amos ix. 10
Hosea xi. 9); or (2) The Home or the State,
which better helps us to understand God’s
dealings with us ?
Request : For a deeper craving to know God.—
Hos. vi. 3, cf. John xvii. 3.
§ 11. Isaian Prophecies in Order of Time.
Upon Amos and Hosea in Israel, follows Isaiah
in Judah.
Since the prophecies contained in the Book of
Isaiah are not found in chronological succession,
scholars differ as to the time to which each should be
assigned, Of the many proposed arrangements we
ISA I A N PROPHECIES IN ORDER OP TIME. 31
here give one specimen. In his <£ Introduction to
the Literature of the Old Testament,” recently pub¬
lished, Prof. Driver, of Oxford, one of the chief
English masters of the science, seems to approve
some such order as this :—
I .—Prophecies of Isaiah himself.
vi. . . . .
.
Refers to Uzziah’s death, 740.
ii.—v. . . .
End of Jotham’s and beginning
of Ahaz’s reign.
xvii. I'll . •
•
Before Syria and Ephraim in-
vade Judah.
vii. 1—ix. 7 1
•
During the Invasion.
M •
X
00
1
X
i.
Possibly after the Invasion.
xxviii. . . .
•
Some time before the fall of
Samaria in 722 B.C.
xix .
0
Plausibly 720 B.C.
xxi. 11 -17 • •
•
720 or 711 B.C.
xv.—xvi. .
•
With epilogue, 711 B.C.
XX.
•
711 B.C.
xxii. 1-14 . .
•
711 or 701 B.C.
xxi. 1-10 . .
•
710 B.C.
xiv. 28-32
■ •
705 B.C.
xxix.— xxxii.
•
702 B.C.
xxii. 15-25
•
Before 701 B.C.
xxiii. . .
«
Before 701 B.C.
x. 5—xii. 6
•
xiv. 24-27
701 B.C., the year of Sen-
xvii. 12-14
nacherib’s invasion of Judah,
xviii.
xxxiii.
32
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
II.— Messages of Later Prophets.
xxxiv. xxxv. . Cir. 586 b.c., beginning of exile,
xm. 1—xiv. 23 . Shortly after 549.
lxvi. . . . After 549.
xxiv. xxvii. . Soon after 539, “ early post exilic.”
of^i°r th r; arie ' y , 0 , fa ?f n “ P r °P° sed > the teacher
of the Guild or Bible-Class will, of course, select and
recommend that which he believes to be the most pro-
bable One evening will be well spent in explaining to
the Class the general grounds on which such arrangement
■s approved. Members might be asked to turn old and
disused copies of the Scriptures to good account by cutting
out the Isa,an oracles or prophecies and gumming them
mto a note-book in the order suggested. This with
historical or expository remarks in the margin would
enable members to trace the growth of the prophet’s
message and to feel the life from which and to which it
came. Isaiah did so much to pave the way to the
evangelic idea of the Kingdom of God as to reward the
closest study. His life-messages should be carefully read
through before we come to the next paragraph.
§ 12. Isaiah, the Prophet of Faith. (740—701 b.c.)
Key-Text. Therefore will Jehovah be exalted, that
He may have mercy, uf on you : blessed are all
they that wait for Him /—Isaiah xxx. 18.
Isaiah’s root idea was of God the King, the alone
exalted (vi. 1-5; ii. ri . I7 ).
So he denounces, as an affront against the Divine
majesty, the sins of rebellion (i. 2)
pride (ii. 11 ; hi. g Q l6 ‘ ’.
’ y> ui, v. 21 , ix. g ; xxviii
'4 22 ; X. 12), v
Isaiah, the Prophet of faith. 33
idols (ii. 8, 18; xvii. 8 ; xxx. 22 ; cf. Micah v.
10-15),
public injustice (Isa. v. 23; x. 1 ; i. 23; xxix.
21),
oppression and expropriation of the poor (iii.
J 4 > 15 > v. 7, 8 ; cf. Micah ii. 2 ; iii. 3 ; vi.
10-15),
drunkenness (Isa. v. 11-22 ; xxviii. 1),
religiousness without morality (i. 13^; xxix. 13).
So he requires humility (ii.), meekness (xxix. 19),
and faith, or humble expectant dependence
on the Alone Exalted (vii. 9 ; xiv. 32 ; xxviii.
16 ; xxx. 15-18 ; x. 20), as also a general reform
and return to justice (v. 7; i. 17, &c. ; cf.
Micah vi. 8).
Jerusalem’s steadfast resistance to Sennacherib’s threat
)f siege and ruin was one of the greatest acts of faith in
history, and was inspired by Isaiah.
The transcendent Jehovah (ii.), or the Jehovah
exalted above earth, who is also Immanu-EL
(God with us, viii. 10 ; vii. 14; viii. 8) uses
the hostile world-empire for His own ends
(x. SIP-), to
destroy the Northern kingdom (xvii. 3 ; vii. 8)
and to
punish Judah (vii. 1 7 1 cf Micah i. 6 ; iii. 12).
He will spare only the remnant of Israel (Isa.
vi. n-13 ; vii. 3 ; x. 20-23).
From this remnant shall spring (xxxvii. 31/;
cf. Micah iv. 6, 7 ; v. 7, 8).
The true Kingdom of God, which is
centred in the Temple at Jerusalem (Isa. ii. 2 ;
xii. 6; cf. Micah iv. 7, 8),
c
I
34 THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
constituted and administered by an ideal
Davidic Prince (Isa. ix. 6, 7; xi. 1) on
whom the Spirit of Jehovah shall rest
(xi. 2-5), and
realized in a reign of enlightenment (ii. 3),
righteousness, peace, exuberant abund¬
ance, and knowledge of God, which shall
be boundless and endless (ii. 2-4; xxx.
23^; ix. 1-7 ; xi. xii).
Cf for the whole picture, Micah iv. 1-5 ; v. 2-15.
Micah’s message is as a whole closely akin to
Isaiah’s,as maybe gathered from citations above.
Micah does not lay Isaiah’s stress on the sole
and sovereign exaltation of Jehovah, but sees
more clearly the deadly effect of sin {cf. Micah
iii. 12, and Jer. xxvi. 18, with Isa. xxviii. 16 :
xxxi. 4, 5, 9; xxxiii. 20).
His deeper sense of sin makes his faith sadder
and more patient (vii. 7-13) and his sense o i
FORGIVENESS more explicit (vii. 18, 19) than
Isaiah’s.
Focal Picture : The scene at the conduit of the
upper pool (Isa. vii.).
Ahaz and his officers inspecting the city water-
supply in anticipation of an early siege.
The city of Jerusalem and the Temple in the
background.
The arrival of Isaiah, and his son with the prophetic
name (“ A Remnant shall return ”).
The daring confidence of the prophet expressed
in every feature, posture, and gesture.
The vacillation of the weak and irresolute King.
THE NEW-FOUND LAW-BOOK.
35
The entire picture visualizing the message—the
source of Luther’s and of every other Reforma¬
tion—“Except ye will believe, surely ye shall
not be established ”: the great doctrine of
Stability by faith.
Topic for discussion : (i) Isaiah’s prophecy of an
Ideal Prince, compared with Plato’s hope of a
king’s son who is also philosopher, and Car¬
lyle’s doctrine of the Hero; or (2) how Amos,
Hosea, and Isaiah added each a clause to
Micah’s threefold message (Micah vi. 8).
Request: For strength to obey the life-call which
comes to our youth (Isa. vi.).
§ 13 . The New-Found Law-Book. (621 b.c.)
Key-Texts. Jehovah , our God , is one Jehovah,
and thou shalt love Jehovah thy God ,, and keep
His charge , and His statutes , and His judg¬
ments^ and His commandments, alway .
Deut. vi. 4, xi. 1.
The approaching downfall of Assyria leads
Nahum (c. 630) to break forth into a paean of
vengeful joy. He is the first prophet to speak
of one “ bringing good tidings ” (N.T. “ preach¬
ing the Gospel”). His “gospel” (i. 15) is,
that Jehovah delivers Judah by overthrowing
Nineveh (iii. 7, 18, i.e., the Kingdom of God
shall be delivered from the kingdom of the
world).
Zephaniah (c. 626), probably in dread of the
Scythian invasion, first foretells utter ruin to
36
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Judah (i. 2-6), but in the end holds out the hope
of an afflicted remnant coming to possess right¬
eousness, Divine favour, and world-wide re¬
nown (iii.).
The Book of the Law was (621 b.c.) found in
the Temple (2 Kings xxii.), adopted in solemn
covenant as statute-book of the realm by King
Josiah and the nation, and made the warrant
of a sweeping reformation (xxiii.).
There is general agreement that this book was Deuter¬
onomy. When it was written we need not here in¬
quire. Some scholars, as Principal Cave, hold that
it was written in the days of Moses. Others, as
Professor Driver, refer its composition to the age of
Manasseh. In any case it was discovered in Josiah’s
time, and fell upon the people as an awful surprise.
Four great unities pervade the many and diverse
laws of this code :
One God (Deut. vi. 4), Master of heaven and earth
(x. 14, 17), Maker of all nations (xiv. 2 ; xxvi.
19), invisible (iv. 12, 15), faithful (vii. 9), loving
(vii. 8) to His people.
One chosen people (vii. 6), peculiar, devoted (holy)
to Jehovah (xiv. 2), His children (xiv. 1), bound
to fear, love, obey Him (x. 12), to shun every¬
thing hateful to Him (xii. 1-3, 29-31 ; xiii., xiv.,
&c ), to show kindness to the widow, fatherless,
Levite, stranger, debtor, poor (passim) ; but
this devotedness (holiness) was to prove itself
by scrupulous compliance with the terms of the
written covenant, “ the words, commandments,
statutes, judgments” entered in the code (v.
311 xii. 32 ; xvii. 18-20, etpassim) :
THE NEW-FOUND LAW-BOOK.
37
One Sanctuary, or chosen place of worship (obvi¬
ously Jerusalem, xii. 5, etpassim ); and
One chosen tribe of priests—the Levites (xviii.).
Deuteronomy gives us the general principle, though
in the terms of legalism, localism, and sacer¬
dotalism, that
Devoted love to God, is the Law of His Kingdom,
and is to be shown in scrupulous obedience to
His manifested Will.
Focal Picture : Adoption of the Solemn League
and Covenant (2 Kings xxiii. 1-13).
The Temple forms the background.
fust in front of it a platform.
The young King in robes of State stands on the
platform.
Around it his court, possibly also his bodyguard.
3efore it the National Convention : the elders:
the priests : the prophets : members of upper
and lower classes.
The Law-Book has just been read.
The King, possibly with upraised hand ( cf. Rev.
x. 5), is repeating the words which pledge him
and his nation to the Covenant.
The people, standing too, indicate acquiescence,
possibly by upraised hands.
Topic for discussion : Can God’s Will for us be
exhaustively set forth in a written code ?
Request : That the law of God may fill us with
a passion for national reform.
38
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
—The Chaldean Period.
§ 14. Order of Jeremiah’s Prophecies.
Since the story of his times forms part of the
Prophets message, and since Jeremiah’s per¬
sonality did more than his speech to unfold the
evangelic secret of the kingdom of God, we
must first carefully trace the course of his life.
It was a life full of heroic adventure and hair¬
breadth ’scapes, beside which the lives of Luther
and Knox seem even tame.
The dates given in certain chapters show plainly
that the prophecies of Jeremiah as now put to¬
gether do not stand in chronological sequence.
As many of the prophecies give no date,
scholars differ in their plans of re-arrangement.
The following order may be submitted for
discussion where another is not preferred bv
the teacher :—
vii.— IX.
Jeremiah began to prophesy 626 b.c.
i., ii.—vi. (in substance).
The Law-Book was found 621.
xi, 1-8 ; xxi. 11-14; xxii. 1-9; xvii. 19-27.
Josiah was slain at Megiddo 608.
xi. 18—xii. 6; xxii. 10-12, 13-19
x. 17-25 ; xxvi. ; xviii.—xx. ; xi. 9-17.
The Chaldeans won the headship of the world at
Carchemish, 604.
XXV., xlvi.—-xlix. 33 ; xii. 7-17 ; xlv., XXXVi., XXXV.,
„ -i X1V r ™ 18 ; xiii '’ xxii - 2 °- 3 °; xxiii. 1-8.
Exile of the best in Judah to Babylon, 597.
XXIV., xxvii. xxix., xlix. 34-39; xx iii. g _ 4Q .
PROPHET OF INDIVIDUAL RELIGION. 39
xxi. 1-10; xxxiv. 1-7, 8-22; xxxvii.—xxxviii.,
xxx.—xxxiii.
Jerusalem fell : second exile to Babylon, 586.
xxxix.—xliii., xliv. (in Egypt).
§ 15. The Prophet of Individual Religion.
Key-Text. This is the Covenant that I will make
vjith the house of Israel: I will put My law in
their inward parts , and in their heart will I
write it; and they shall all know Me: for I
will forgive their iniquity . Jer. xxxi. 33, 34.
Jeremiah’s mind is imbued witii the idea of Cove¬
nant. At first he is an itinerant preacher of
the old Covenant just re-affirmed by Josiah (xi.
1-8) ; but afterwards, despairing of its fulfilment,
he turns to the hope of a new Covenant (xxxi.
31 - 34 ).
He laments that he cannot find one righteous man
in Jerusalem (v. 1-9). Rich and poor (v. 4, 5),
priest and prophet (v. 30, 31 ; xxiii. gfi), North
and South (iii.) are wicked and impenitent.
The chief sin he denounces is
breach of covenant (xi. 10 ; xxii. 9 ; xxxiv. 18,
&c.) shown in
forsaking Jehovah for strange gods (i. 16 ; ii. 11 ;
vi. 19 ; xi. 13, &c.).
falsity, faithlessness and covetousness (vi. 13,
viii. 10 f ; ix. 2-6 ; xxiii. 10, &c.) ; e.g., extorting
unpaid labour (xxii. 13-17 ; cf Hab. ii. 9-12),
and refusing to free the slave (Jer. xxxiv. 8-22).
He requires faithfulness (cf Hab. ii. 4), justice and
kindness from man to man and from man to
40
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
God (Jen v. I, 28 ; vii. 5^ ; ix. 23, 24 ; xxii. 3,
&c.), but in vain (vii. 24-28).
Therefore the Chaldeans shall seize the land and
carry away the people (xx. 4-6 ; xxv. gff., &c.).
Even Zion, fondly thought inviolable, shall be
destroyed (vii. 14; xxvi. 6).
Jehovah uses Nebuchadnezzar to execute His ven¬
geance upon the kingdoms, and gives him
dominion over all nations (xxvii. 7-8).
Religion no longer depends upon the Holy Land,
for God accepts His people’s prayer in Babylon
(xxix., contrast Hosea ix. 3, 4), nor upon the
Temple at Jerusalem, for that shall be destroyed
(vii., xxvi.), but upon the personal relation of the
individual to God (xxxi. 34). The individual
alone is responsible (xvii. 9, 10 ; xxxi. 30).
This new truth, of the religious worth of the individual
is Jeremiah’s chief contribution to the idea of the
Kingdom. Thus he shows that
The kingdom and capital of Judah may perish, but
not the Kingdom of God ; for
The people of Israel (xxxi. 1, 9) and Judah (xxiii
6) shall return from captivity to Zion (xxxi.
8-12), shall dwell in safety and plenty and glad¬
ness (xxxi. 12, 14, 27) under a just and wise
Scion of the house of David “ Jehovah-our-
righteousness ” (xxiii. 5, 6); and
God will make a New Covenant with them,
according to which He forgives their sin (xxxi.
34), writes His law in the heart of each (xxxi.
33 ) an d is personally known by every one of
them (xxxi. 34, cf Hab. ii. 14).
PROPHET OF INDIVIDUAL RELIGION. 41
Focal Scenes : (1) Jeremiah at the Gate of the
Temple (vii. 1-15 ; xxvi.).
The custom of reciting religious dialogues might be
applied and expanded in the reproduction of this
dramatic episode by members of the class.
The Temple. Entering worshippers, pilgrims from
other cities, admire the sacred buildings and
exclaim,
Jehovah’s Temple, Jehovah’s Temple,
Jehovah’s Temple are these !
[eremiah enters, takes his stand in the court of the
Temple, and speaks as in vii. 2-15.
He is heard with increasing impatience by the
increasing crowd. At last “ the priests ” first,
then “ the prophets,” then the crowd behind
them, rush on him, seize him, and say as in
xxvi. 8 and 9.
The princes, hearing of the disturbance, come up
from the royal palace to the new Temnle gate,
and sit to award justice (ver. 10).
The trial begins: priests and prophets are the
accusers (ver. 11). The people wait to hear the
princes.
Jeremiah speaks (vers. 12-15).
The verdict of the princes echoed by the shout of
the people : Not Guilty (ver. 16).
Confirmatory precedent quoted by elders (vers. 18,
19).
Jeremiah, safeguarded by Ahikam, departs un¬
molested by the mob (ver. 24).
(2) The story of an African slave, who trusted in
Jehovah, saved Jeremiah, and though a non-
42
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Israelite, was accepted by Jehovah (xxxviii.,
xxxix. 15-18), may be told as a foregleam of the
future universality of Israel’s religion.
Topic for discussion: Jeremiah’s character as re¬
vealed by his writings, and as misconceived by
vulgar ignorance.
Request : That times of changing faith may make
more clear the law of God within.
§ 16. Ezekiel, the Prophet of Regeneration.
(A 592-570 b.c.).
Key-Text. I work not for your sake, but for Mine
holy name which ye have profaned; and the
nations shall know that I am Jehovah. —Ezek.
xxxvi. 22, 23.
In the gloom of the Exile, he depicts Israel as totally
depraved (ii. 3 ; v. 6, &c.), as a rebellious house
(ii. 5, 6, 8, &c.), worse than Sodom (xvi. 48), and
always evil (xx.). Idolatry is the very head and
front of his offending. Israel is therefore the
doomed object of Jehovah’s fury (viii. 18 ; xxi.
3M
But Jehovah, while visiting the nations with His
anger (xxv.—xxxii.), will, only for His own sake
(xxxvi. 22, &c.),
Breathe new life into the dry bones of the House of
Israel, raise them from their grave (xxxvii.), re¬
place the heart of stone with a heart of flesh
(xi. 19; xxxvi. 26), put His Spirit in them
(xxxvi. 27 ; xxxvii. 14), make them obedient (xi.
20 ; xxxvi. 27);
THE PROBLEM OF THE EXILE.
43
Will bring them back to their own land (xxxvii. 21),
and
Reunite north and south in everlasting security,
plenty, and populousness (xxxiv. 12-16, 25-29;
xxxvi. 9-11, 29-38 ; xxxvii. 15-28) under David,
who shall be prince for ever (xxxiv. 23 ; xxxvii.
24, 25).
The Kingdom of God shall be established on earth
only for the ends of God and by the regenera¬
tive Spirit of God, animating people else de¬
serving utter condemnation.
Topic for discussion : To earlier prophets (Isa. i.
21-26 ; Jer. ii. 1-3) Israel’s past seemed bright,
but to Ezekiel wholly dark. How came this
difference of view ?
Request : That we may base our prospects, not on
our deserts, but on God’s own purposes.
§ 17. The Problem of the Exile.
Key-Text. Behold , God is great , and we know
Him not. —Job xxxvi. 26.
In the book of Job, which is the highest outcome of
the Wisdom Literature of Israel, the story of
Job (Ezek. xiv. 14) is worked out into a philo¬
sophic drama which argues the question, Why
do the righteous suffer ?
The time when the drama was written is not stated, and
has hence been the theme of much controversy, but
probably lay in the period of the Exile. The troubles
of Job dramatically set forth the troubles of righteous
Israel,
44
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
The orthodox opinion was that God, as righteous judge,
always awarded woe to the wicked and weal to the
righteous (e.g\, Isa. iii. io, n). Now
Here is suffering. Why is it ?
“ Because the sufferer has sinned ! ” say the “friends,”
who stick to the old views (iv. 7, 8 ; xi. 14 ; xv.
15^; xviii. sj-)-
So, for example, Ezekiel explained the calamities of
Israel.
“ But I have not sinned so as to deserve these
woes,” replies the sufferer (x. 2-7 ; xii. 4 ; xiii. 18 ;
xxiii. 10-12 ; xxix.—xxxi.); “ I will not belie my
integrity in order to suit your theories (xxvii
5, 6). Your theories do not fit the facts (xiii
4-12, &c.). The righteous suffer (xxiv. &c.)
the wicked prosper (xii. 6 ; xxi. 7 ff.,
The Israel to whom belonged faithful souls like
Moses, Elijah, Isaiah, Josiah, Jeremiah, and then
following, was not, even though now in exile,
wholly the “rebellious house ” which some prophet*
pictured it ( cf. Ezek. ii. 3, et passim). Also the
best had often suffered most, while the wicked
flourished (Jer. xii. £-6). The better part of the
nation was first to go into captivity (Jer. xxiv.).
The Voice from the whirlwind declares that God is
too great and His universe too vast for mortal
man to understand His ways (Job xxxviii.—xii.).
The traditional dogmatists are rebuked (xlii.
7-9) and the sufferer is awed into silent sub¬
mission to the Inscrutable Will (xl. 1-5 ; xlii.
2 - 6 ).
GREAT PROPHECY OF REDEMPTION. 45
This is an answer, but only an answer in part, to the
problem. It marks that widening of the mental
horizon which at first seems to involve Agnosticism,
but which is really the lifting of the mind from the
old answer to the new. Job teaches us that
The Kingdom of God is the realm of the Infinite
and Eternal, and therefore includes purposes
and processes which are beyond our power to
explain.
Topic for discussion : Satan among the sons of
God (i. 6; ii. 1), or the function of Agnosticism
in the extension of religious knowledge.
Request : For a reverent sense of the mystery that
enfolds all things.
III.—The Medo-Persian Period.
§ 18. The Great Prophecy of Redemption.
(Isa. xl.—Ixvi. For end of Exile.)
Key-Text. He was woundedfor our transgressions ,
He was b?'uised for our iniquitiesj and with
His stripes we are healed. —Isa. liii. 5.
On all hands it is agreed that this prophecy was specially
meant for the Jews towards the end of their captivity,
when Cyrus, King of Medes and Persians, was be¬
ginning to dispute with Babylon the headship of the
world. Many scholars hold that it was written by a
prophet at this time. Others have supposed that
Isaiah, son of Amos, was enabled, in Hezekiah’s or
Manasseh’s time, to write just as though he lived in
the time of the Exile. Either view justifies us in
46
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
treating it as though written at the later date. It
teaches that—
Jehovah, who is God alone (xliii. 10-12 ; xliv. 6 •
xlv. 5, &c.), Eternal (xl. 28 ; lvii. 15), and In*
finite (xl. 12-28) Creator (xl. 28 ; xlii. 5, &c.),
has chosen out of the nations His Servant
Israel (xli. 8, 9) to be the agent of revelation
and salvation to all mankind (xlii. 4-7 j xlv. 22 ;
xlix. 6; li. 4-6; lxi. 11 • lxvi. 23).
Yet the Persian Cyrus is called Jehovah’s Anointed or
the Lord’s Christ (xlv. 1).
This elective purpose is not revoked in the calamities
of the Exile (xl. 27 ; xlix. 14; li. 7, 8, 12-15), 01
by reason of the people’s unfaithfulness (xlii
24; xliii. 6—xliv. 6). For
[here is an Israel within Israel (xlix. 3-6), one with
Isiael, yet distinct from him (lii. 13—liii, 12)
who shall accomplish Jehovah’s purpose (xlii
i-7).
1 his is the ideal Israel within the real ( cf Romani
ix. 6, 7), Israel according to the spirit as distinguished
from Israel according to the flesh, the soul of good
in the evil nation, the spiritual unity active in the
line of the prophets (in the prophet himself, 1. 4 9 •
lxi. 1-3) and typified perhaps in Jeremiah {cf. liii. 7
withjer. xi. 19).
By this distinction the prophet is enabled to solve the
problem of the Exile (§ 17). The nation, as a whole,
has been no blameless sufferer like Job (xlii. 18-25 ;
xliii. 24 ; liii. 6 ; lviii. 1 ; lix.), nor has it been wholly
and solely a “rebellious house”; there is the inner
Israel, represented by the faithful Israelites,
GREAT PROPHECY OF REDEMPTION. 47
The righteous Servant of Jehovah (liii. 11) who
suffers to the death, not for any fault of his
own (liii. 9), but for the sins of the unfaithful
Israelites (liii. 4-6); yet
shall rise to new and victorious life (liii. 10-12),
and
shall give light and law to the world (xlii. 1 ff. ;
xlix. iff; lxi. 3 ff).
It is simple fact that the constancy of the true Jews,
under the sufferings they endured in the Exile for
the sins of the nation, saved the nation from being
absorbed into heathendom, and restored it to a new
and purer life. This Servant of Jehovah, as he is
spoken of so grandly in Isaiah lii. 13— liii. 12, it
should be explained, is taken by some to be the faith¬
ful or ideal Israel; by others to be the prophets or
some particular prophet; by others still, to be the
personal Messiah.
.srael is forgiven (xliv. 22) and shall return from
captivity (xliv. 26-28; li. n, &c.). The light
and glory of God shall rest on Zion (lx.), which
shall become the centre of world-wide rule (lx.
12) and worship (lxvi. 23). Gentiles shall be
admitted to the priesthood (lvi. 7 ; lxvi. 20 /.).
Righteousness, prosperity, and peace shall be
universal and everlasting (lx. ; lxi. 11 ; lxv. 17 ff).
Observe, “ My righteousness ” and “ My salvation ”
are parallel terms (li. 5, 6, &c.).
The Kingdom of God is to be realized on a sin¬
ful earth by the vicarious suffering of the
righteous, and in particular by that of the
Servant of Jehovah.
48
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Topic for discussion : The Soul of social cohesion
which suffers in the good for the bad—in Israel,
in England, in mankind—what is It, or how
shall we name It ?
Request: For grace to help us to bear one
another’s burdens (Gal. vi. 2).
§ 19. The Prophecy of Resurrection.
(Isaiah xxiv.—xxvii.)
Key-Text. He will destroy m this mountain the
face of the covering that is cast over all peoples ,
and the veil that is spread over all nations.
He hath swallowed up death for ever. —Isaiah
xxv. 7, 8.
These four chapters are, according to general critical
opinion, not Isaiah’s. By the most eminent scholars
they are assigned to the time of the Return from
Babylon.
The faith of the Exile (xxiv. 23), conflicting with
the facts of the Return (xxiv. 1-20), results in
a hope superior to death.
Rather than that the promise of Jehovah should fail,
The dead shall rise (xxvi. 19), and death itself shall
be destroyed (xxv. 8 ; cf. Job xix. 25-27).
Jehovah of Hosts Himself shall reign in Zion (xxiv.
2 3 )> shall there joyously entertain all peoples
(xxv. 6).
The consummation of the Kingdom of God
implies the destruction of death.
Two other prophets of the period less boldly portray the
future.
PLVIEfr OF THE PROPHETIC IDEAL. 49
Haggai (520 b.c.), concerned about the New Temple
(i. 4, &c.), declares that after great international
convulsions (ii. 6, 21 /), the desirable things of
all nations shall be brought to it, and it shall
surpass the Old Temple in glory (ii. 7, 9).
Zecharjah (i.—viii., 520-518 b.c.) tells of the re¬
union oi Jehovah’s scattered people in Zion
(viii. 7, 8) in peace and populousness (ii. 4, 5),
and of many other nations who shall be joined
to Jehovah in Zion (ii. 11 ; viii. 20-23). The
Branch shall build the Temple and reign in
glory (vi. 12, 13).
TOPIC for discussion : Disappointment or satis¬
faction—which has most widened the world’s
hope ?
Request : For a holiness that shall not shut out
the playfulness of boys and girls (Zech. viii.
i-5).
§ 20. Review of the Prophetic Ideal.
Key-Text. In many pants and in many ways
God . . . spake of old time to the fathers in
the prophets. —Heb. i. 1.
As guides to the meaning of the Kingdom of God the
prophets stand next in importance to the three great
Apostles and the Master Himself. The prophetic unfold¬
ing of the Ideal must therefore be viewed in its entirety.
The hints and glimpses given here may be expanded in
Class.
The period of the literary prophets (§§ 8-19)
stretches in the main from about 760 to about 500
B.C. (Malachi wrote about sixty or seventy years
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
later), or over two and a half centuries,—nearly as
long as from Shakespeare to Browning. The out¬
ward history of Israel is tragic enough. In the
eighth century Assyria destroys the northern, sub¬
dues and all but destroys the southern kingdom.
In the seventh century, Judah, still subdued, hardly
survives schism within and Scythians without. In
the sixth century, Judah is taken captive to Babylon;
but, enabled by Cyrus, a few Jews return to share a
precarious lot. This time of outward humiliation
was one of unique religious exaltation.
In the thought of the prophets the Kingdom of
God advances in extent from the ancient Davidic
realm (Amos ix. 8-12) to all the world (Isa. xl.—lxvi.),
from Israel and a few neighbouring peoples to man¬
kind ; but Israel ever abides the ruling nation, and
the whole centres in Zion. The ideal of the Kingdom
also deepens in content.
God is set forth by Amos as just; by Hosea as
merciful; by Isaiah as transcendent and yet im-
manu-El ; by Jeremiah as alone righteous, freed
from local or national limits, directly related to the
individual; by Ezekiel as immeasurably remote,
acting for His own ends, terrible ; by Isa. xl.—lxvi.
as possessed by an eternal and universal purpose
of righteousness which is salvation, the source of
vicarious and saving grief, the God who comforts
and revives; by Isa. xxiv.—xxvii. as the World-
shaker and Destroyer of death.
What is required in the subjects of the Kingdom
is likewise progressively unfolded ; but the sense of
the people’s failure to meet these requirements goes
on deepening until Jeremiah declares that not a
REVIEW OF THE PROPHETIC IDEAL.
51
single righteous man can be found, and Ezekiel sees
only evil in the whole history of the people. Yet all
the prophets agree that in and through this people,
so sinful, God will realize His Kingdom on earth.
But how ? Amos answers, By the death of every
sinner. Hosea, By trouble leading the people to
penitence. Isaiah, By a Davidic Scion dispensing
the spirit of Jehovah. Micah, By an heir of David
championing the punished and pardoned flock of
God. Jeremiah, By a New Covenant, under which
Jehovah comes into personal intimacy with every
one, forgiving and directing all. Ezekiel, By the
breathing of the Spirit of Jehovah into the dead
nation. Isa. xl.—lxvi., By righteous Israel, or
Jenovah’s Righteous Servant, suffering vicariously
for the sins of the unrighteous. Isa. xxiv.—xxvii.,
By overturn of the existing world-order, by resurrec¬
tion and the annihilation of death.
Of the Kingdom when realized, the features
drawn by the various prophets may be thus
blended :
Peace . war unknown ^ the wealth once wasted in
war now used to increase wealth :
Plenty . starvation and poverty abolished j exceed¬
ing fruitfulness of soil; abundance of corn and
wine and oil and flocks and herds and of all
rural growths ; to these were added later : great
material magnificence, a profusion of the most
highly prized products of civilization.
Health ; long life ; life beyond death ; annihilation
of death.
Populousness : extraordinary multiplication of life,
countless hosts of human beings.
52
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
Liberty : intelligence ;
Eternal security and stability.
Righteousness universal : public justice; private
rectitude ; faithfulness;
Kindness ; gentleness, helpfulness ;
Joy exultant, musical, festal :
Worship of God, public, regular, universal, led by
an unceasing line of priests ;
Knowledge of God : loving personal intimacy be¬
tween Him and every soul in His Kingdom.
Glory, an overspreading, pervading splendour; a
brilliance above that of sun or moon ; an
irradiation of the Divine life and glory.
God everywhere glorified.
The thought outlined by these rough jottings, is still
tied to Zion, priestly caste, and Israel; but even thus re¬
stricted it comprises all the nations, and covers almost the
whole range of human needs, physical, social, moral, and
religious, even caring in a rudimentary way for art and
science. Based on the solid earth it rises to the Heavens,
and omits not the intermediate grades.
Topic for discussion : What is the chief inspiration
furnished by the prophets of Israel for modern
Social reform ?
Request : That the spirit of the Lord God may be
upon us, anointing us to bring good tidings to
the poor. (Isa. lxi.)
§ 21. The Reign of Written Law.
Key-Texts. Ezra, the priest , brought the Law
before the congregation j and they e 7 itered into
a curse and an oath to walk in God's law which
THE REIGN OF WRITTEN LA W.
53
was given by the hand of Moses. —Neh. viii. 2,
and x. 29.
The work in Jerusalem (from 458 B.C.) of
** Ezra, the priest, the scribe of the words of the
commandments of Jehovah,” who is armed with
full authority (Ezra vii. 11-26), establishes the
undisputed reign of the written Law (Neh.
x. 29).
About this time prophecy expires with Malachi
(perhaps ft. 433).
The scribe takes the place of the prophet ; and the
priest is a substitute for the king.
This ascendancy of Law follows from the successive
adoption of Codes, or the emergence (or re-emer¬
gence) into public acknowledgment of several layers
of legislation.
(Observe the distinction between “adoption” and “com¬
position,” or even “compilation.”
The legislation in Exodus xx.—xxiii.—“ the Law of
many Sanctuaries”—was accepted first; when,
is a matter of controversy. Jehovah is to be
worshipped in every place (xx. 24) where He
has recorded His Name. Priests are not men¬
tioned. The feasts are three: Unleavened
Bread, First Fruits, Ingathering (xxiii. 14-17).
Deuteronomy, u the Law of one Sanctuary,” was
adopted by Josiah and the people in 621 B.C.
(see § 13). Jehovah is to be worshipped only
in one place (xii. 13, 14). The tribe of Levi are
all to be priests, without distinction of order
(xviii. 1-8). The feasts are three: Passover,
Weeks, Tabernacles (xvi. 1-17).
54
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Ezekiel’s law of priestly grades was announced in
574 B.c. Jehovah’s throne in one sanctuary
(xliii. 7) is most minutely described. It speaks
of two orders of priests : the sons of Zadok,
and the other Levites (xl. 46; xliv. 10-16).
There are sevej'al feasts, number not specified
(xlv. 1 7 \ cf. 18-23 ; xlvi. 3, 6-11).
The Aaronic Code, or the law of triple hierarchy,
was adopted from Ezra by the people in 444
B.C. (Neh. viii.—x.). Its principal contents are
found in the latter part of Exodus, in Leviticus,
and in parts of Numbers. The one sanctuary
is everywhere prominent. There are three
orders of ecclesiastics: High priest, priests
(Ex. xl.), and Levites (Num. iii. 3-4; iv. 9 ; viii.
19; xvi. 10-40; xviii.). The feasts are seven:
Sabbath, Passover, First Fruits, Pentecost,
Trumpets, Day of Atonement, Tabernacles
(Lev. xxiii.).
As the Class by this time ought to know, some scholars
hold that all these Codes (except Ezekiel’s) were
written (perhaps by different hands) at the direction
of Moses himself, and were long afterwards re-dis¬
covered and adopted by the people ; while others
hold that the Law, which began with Moses, grew
larger and fuller as the life of the nation advanced,
and that the Codes—which were compiled not very
long before their adoption—mark the several stages
of its growth. Both positions are maintained by
devout Christian thinkers.
Topic for discussion : The prophet and the scribe
compared and contrasted ; their modern coun¬
terparts,
PRINCIPLES OF THE WRITTEN LAW. 55
Request : For an earnest desire to bring every
part of our life, public and private, into accord
with the will of God.
§ 22. Principles of the Written Law.
Key-Text. Ye shall be holy , for /, Jehovah , your
God , am holy. —Lev. xix. 2.
This is the principle which governs all the codes
(Ex. xxii. 31 ; Deut. xiv. 2 ; Lev. xx. 26), and
so far makes them one. Jehovah stands to the
people on all sides of their being as adorable
Lord ; they must stand to Him on all sides of
their being as worshipping subjects. Life must
be entirely ruled by religion. Every phase of
it, little or great, outward or inward, is to be in
accord with the revealed Will of God. Hence
are derived the other great principles of the
Law ; as, for example, those regarding
Land. —Jehovah is the only landowner (Lev. xxv.
23) ; holders are but lodgers and aliens {Ibid.) ;
He specifies how the land shall be tilled (Deut.
xxii. 9, &c.), when it shall lie fallow (Ex. xxiii.
11 ; Lev. xxv. 1-7), and how part, at least, of its
produce shall be applied (Deut. xxiv. 19 ; Lev.
xix. 10 ; xxiii. 22, &c.). The law' of Jubilee (Lev.
xxv.), which requires all rural (not urban) pro¬
perty in land to revert every fifty years to the
families originally possessing it, would per¬
petuate peasant proprietorship and make great
landlords impossible.
Labour. —Jehovah is Master-in-chief. All Israelites
are His servants (Lev. xxv. 55). Wage-earners
56
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
must not be oppressed, but paid promptly
(Deut. xxiv. 14 f ; Lev. xix. 13). Hebrew
slaves are to be treated humanely, to have one
day’s rest in seven (Ex. xx. 8-12), and to be
freed after six years’ bondage (Ex. xxi. 2-6 ;
Deut. xv. 12-18). Not so foreign labour (Lev.’
xxv. 43-46).
Trade.— (Deut. xxv. 13 ff.). God is the giver o 1
wealth (Deut. viii. 17, 18), and regulates its use
(passim). Loans must be freely granted to
fellow-Israelites, but no interest exacted (Ex.
xxii. 25 ; Deut. xv. 7-11 ; Lev. xxv. 35 ex¬
cept from foreigners (Deut. xxiii. 19). All debts
(except foreigners’) cancelled every seven years
(Deut. xv. 1-6).
Spending.— There may be full and thankful enjoy¬
ment of all good things (Deut. viii. 7-10; xi.
13-15 ; xxvi. 10, n). Giving must be propor¬
tionate and regular, and besides, spontaneous
(tithes, sacrifices, freewill offerings, vows, gifts
to poor, Deut. xii. ; xv. 10, 11 ; xvi. 17 ; xxiii. 21.
&c.).
Poor-laws.— Tithes (Deut. xiv. 29), feasts (Deut.
xvi. 11-147, gleanings (Deut. xxiv. 19; Lev. xix.
10), loans without interest and gifts (Deut. xv.
7-11), periodical restoration of liberty (Deut. xv
12), and patrimony (Lev. xxv.) are for the pre¬
servation of the poor (Deut. xv. 11), and the
abolition of poverty (Deut. xv. 4).
Health.— Cleanliness (passim), sanitation (Deut
xxiii. 14), safely built houses (Deut. xxii. 8)
notification and isolation of contagious disease
(Lev. xiii.—xv.), rest on Sabbath and feast days
PRINCIPLES OF THE WRITTEN LAW. 57
(Ex. xx. 8-12 ; Deut. xvi. 8), are enjoined.
Though not on grounds of health, Diet (Deut.
xiv- 3 # ; Lev. vii. 22-27 ; xi.) and Dress (Deut.
xxii. 5, 11, 12 ; Num. xv. 37 ff.) are regulated.
Topic for discussion : Selecting any one of the
principles specified above (Land, Labour, &c.),
how far may we adopt them as maxims of
modern validity ? For example, are there not
Divine laws of health discoverable, which
should be religiously obeyed ?
Or take the group of laws connected with the Fourth
Commandment, and discuss the following state¬
ments :—
Scholars tell us of a dark and heathen origin for
the institution of the Sabbath, and only thereby fling
into brighter relief the humanizing and hallowing influ¬
ence of Hebrew religion. But the Christian concep¬
tion of the Sabbath stands above the Jewish as the
Jewish stands above the heathen. For, strip the
Sabbatic idea of its historic rind, and what have you
left? Is it not the essential need of re-creation to
human life ? Relaxation must alternate with tension.
The nature of man demands opportunity to recover
exhausted energies and to revert to its norm. .
He must have his moments of expansion—physical,
mental, social, and therefore religious. For religion
is the prime factor of integration. To be saved is
literally to be made whole. It is no accident, but a
deeply significant evolution which renders the Fourth
Commandment in German school primers,—‘Thou
shalt observe thy holy days,’ or which in English has
turned holy days into holidays.
“ The Saturday half-holiday, the Ten Hours’ Act,
the Eight Hours’ Movement, are only so many phases
5 §
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
of the Sabbatic development. They are so much
commentary on the text, ‘The Sabbath was made
for man, not man for the Sabbath.’ ... It should
be ours to oppose every attempt for the secularization
of Sunday, with a steady consecration to whole-
human, and therefore religious, uses of the daily
Sabbath and the yearly Sabbath, as well as of the
weekly Sabbath. The annual holiday ought to be
the Sabbath of the year.”
Request : “ Hallow us in the truth ” (John xvii. 17).
§22. Principles of the Written Law ( Continued ).
The underlying principle set forth in the Key
Text and already exemplified in the case of Land,
Labour, Trade, Spending, Poor Laws, and Health,
is further related to
The Home, its purity (Ex. xx. 14, &c.), obedience
(Ex. xx. 12, &c.), instruction (Deut. vi. 7) ;
administration of justice, pure (Deut. xvi. 18-20,
&c.), graded and devolved (Ex. xviii.);
and the conduct of war (Deut. xx.).
Worship, social (Deut. xii. 18, &c.), and national
(Deut. xvi. 16), with its requirements (priests,
sanctuary, dues, &c.), must be maintained
{passim). The Feasts celebrate deeds of
Jehovah in nature (Ex. xxiii. 14-17) and in
national history (Deut. xvi., &c.), and bring the
nation into one place (Deut. xvi. 16) and one
act (Lev. xvi.). The thickening wall of priest¬
hood and of holy spaces between the people
and Jehovah {passim) teaches the awful dis¬
tance of God from ordinary human life, and yet
PRINCIPLES OF THE WRITTEN LA W. 59
His ultimate approachableness through appro¬
priate mediators. So the minute rules about
architecture and upholstery of the Tabernacle,
the vestments, anointings, and washings of
priests. Sacrifice is an act of communion (meal,
Num. xxviii. 2, &c.) with God, and must be the
offering of the worshipper’s best {passim).
Sacrifice for sin has in view the restoration of
communion, and may be offered for the un¬
witting (Lev. iv. ; Num. xv. 22) and witting
(Lev. v.) sinner, whether person or nation
(Lev. xvi. 6-17), but not for the wilful and defiant
(Num. xv. 30). Wrong done to a fellow-
Israelite requires reparation to him and atone¬
ment before God (Lev. vi. 1-7).
No exhaustive analysis of the Law is here attempted.
A few hints only are given to suggest how a
fuller analysis may be carried out.
These laws are resolved into requiring towards
God devoted love (Deut. x. 12 ; vi. 5) and
scrupulous awe (Ex. xx. 5; xxxiv. 14; Deut
iv. 24).
The Law is an amalgam of priestly and prophetic ideas.
Physical and moral purity or impurity are not yet pro¬
perly distinguished. There is one rule for dealing with
Israelites, and another for dealing with foreigners.
Penalties mercilessly severe, and institutions, like
slavery and inferior status of woman, are still retained.
But the root-peril of this written Law is the idea that
God’s will can be exhaustively set forth in statutory
form—in a series of rules and regulations—literal com¬
pliance with which is His only requirement.
Yet with all its faults (Heb. viii. 7, 8), the reign of written
6o
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Law schooled the people (Gal. iii. 24) into the con¬
viction that every part of life, down to the minutest
things, has its divinely appointed duties, and gradually
induced a temper of devout conscientiousness.
Its very externalities helped to keep the Jewish
Church from immersion in heathendom, and to pre¬
serve its inner spirit until the fulness of the times had
come.
Topic for discussion : The value of external forms—
for example, Are national religious assemblies
(Deut. xvi. 16) a permanent national need ? How
far are they kept up in our denominational
Union Meetings, Assemblies, Synods, Convoca¬
tions, Congresses, International Councils?
Request : That our love be made perfect to the
casting out of fear.—1 John iv. 17.
§ 23. The Hymnals of the Jews.
Key-Text. Thou art the Holy One , enthroned
upon the praises of Israel .—Psalm xxii. 3.
The Psalter is commonly thought of as one book by
one author. But out of 150 psalms only seventy-
three, or less than half, are ascribed to David,
twenty-seven bear other names, and fifty, or
one-third of the whole, are anonymous.
The name prefixed to a Psalm does not necessarily indicate
its real author. Scholars differ in opinion as to the
number of Psalms that can be attributed to David
himself. It is held by not a few that most of the
Psalms were composed in and after the Exile. John
Calvin thought that some were written in the time of
the Maccabees (from 167 b.c.).
THE HYMNALS OF THE JEWS.
6l
The Psalter contains FIVE books or compilations
(see R.V.) i.—xli.; xlii.—lxxii.; lxxiii.—lxxxix.;
xc.—cvi.; cvii.—cl. It may have begun as one
compilation, or more, to which other compila¬
tions were added. Sankey’s Hymn-Book, with
its successive supplements, has been mentioned
as an illustration of this method of growth, or
the present division into five books may, it has
been suggested, be attributed to one editorial
act.
A very conservative scholar like Hengstenberg fol¬
lows a tradition which refers the compilation of
these books to the time of Nehemiah, after 444
B.C.; others, like Canon Cheyne, put the com¬
pilation of the last books (iv. and v.) soon after
142 B.c. We are safe in saying that the com¬
pilations reflect the devotional life of the Jews
in the period stretching over the three hundred
years from 444 to 140 B.C.
Carefully distinguish between compilation and authorship.
E.g.„ the “Congregational Hymnal” (1888) contains
hymns ascribed to authors ranging from Moses to
Tennyson. But as a compilation it reflects the life of
the Churches using it to-day; just as the collection
called the “New Congregational Hymn-Book”
reflected the very different life of the same Churches
thirty years ago.
At whatever time the separate Psalms were written,
The five books show how the Kingdom of God was
understood by the Jews while the hymnals were
being compiled — i.e., at least from 444 to 140
B.c. They reveal the spiritual life of the people
who lived under the reign of the written law.
62
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
They are of value to us, not so much because
they contain the praises of this or that poet, but
because they show us “the praises of Israel”
upon which the Lord of the Kingdom is en¬
throned.
Topic for investigation: The growth of English
spiritual life as reflected in the succession of
the chief English hymn-books.
Request : That our worship in song may be sin¬
cere, springing from the inmost life.—Eph. v. 19.
§ 24. The Hope of the Kingdom set to Music.
Key Texts. Jehovah is Kingj . . let the earth
rejoice : . . . for He shall judge the world with
righteousness. —Psalm xcvi. 10, n, 13 ( cj.
xcvii. 1).
In the Psalms the Kingdom of God is spoken oJ
as
Already existing, ruling over all for ever (ciii. 19-
xxii. 28 ; xcvii. ; xcix. ; cxlv. 13). But plaint is
raised continually that much exists which is at
variance with the Kingdom. Appeal is there¬
fore made to the reigning Jehovah to interpose
as Judge, to put things right, to save His
people, and vindicate Plis righteousness (lxvii.;
lxxii. ; lxxxii. 8). This prayer rises through
humble trust in God, and a chastened sense of
intimacy with Him, to an exultant joy, and to
the hope of a
Good time coming, when Jehovah shall appear as
Vindicator, and vanquish all that opposes His
HOPE OF THE KINGDOM SET TO MUSIC . 63
Kingdom (ix. 7, 8 ; xxii. 27; lxv. 2; Ixvii. 7; lxxxii.
8 ; lxxxvi. 9 ; xcvi. 11-14 ; xcviii. 7-9); when all
wrongs shall be redressed (Ixxii. 4, &c.), the
Poor and Needy succoured and championed
(Ixxii. 12 et passzm), mercy and truth and
righteousness established (Ixxii. 2; Ixxxv. 10-13;
xcvi. n-14; xcviii. 7-9, &c.), permanent peace
secured (Ixxii. 7, &c.), and Nature subdued
(viii. 6-8), sympathetic (xciii.; xcvi. 10 ff., &c.)
and fruitful (Ixxxv. 12 ; Ixxii. 16).
The prospect of this Day of Judgment only calls forth the
most melodious gladness. We are further told of an
Agent of Jehovah by whom it will be ushered in.
Jehovah has set His King in Zion (ii. 6), His
Anointed (2), calls him His Son (7), and pro¬
mises him universal dominion (8, cf. xx. 6; xlv.
6, 7).
Jehovah sets at His right hand a Ruler (cx. 1), who
is also Priest for ever (4), and subdues his
enemies before him (5, 6).
Prayer is offered (Ixxii.) for a Prince, a vicegerent of
God (1), ruling a world-wide realm (8-12) in
righteousness (2, 3) and chivalry (12-14), amid
peace without end (3-7), profuse plenty (16) and
unceasing piety (5).
These hopes often hung round the line of David
(lxxxix., &c.), and mostly centred in Zion (ii.;
1.; xlviii.; lxxvi.; cii.; cxxii., &c.).
TOPIC for discussion : Poetry and music : their
place in the Kingdom.
Request : For inspired souls to-day to set forth in
song the wrongs and the rights and the salva¬
tion of the poor.
64 THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
§ 25. The Greek Yoke Broken.
Key-Text. Mattathias said, Though all the
nations that dwell in the king's kingdom
hearken to him , to depart every man from
the service of his fathers and to make his
commandments their choice , yet I and my
sons ana my brethren shall walk in the
Covenant of our fathers. —i Macc. ii. 19.
The world-empire, which was Assyrian till 604 b.c.,
Chaldean till 53&> and then Medo-Persian,
passed in 333 into the hands of Alexander
the Great, who brought the East under the
sway of Greek civilization (Daniel viii. 20,
21 ; 1 Macc. i.). The Jews became his subjects
in 332. When he died (323) the empire was
divided among his generals (Daniel viii. 22 ; xi.
4 )- Egypt fell to Ptolemy and hU une (“the
King of the South,” xi. 5). The chief Asiatic
portion fell in 321 to Seleucus, who called him¬
self in 306 King ol Syria (“ the King of the
North,” xi. 6). Under his dynasty (the Seleu-
CID^e) Syria became by far the greatest of the
kingdoms sprung from Alexander’s empire.
From 320 till a hundred years later, Judsea was
under the rule of Egypt and the Ptolemies. I.
and II. Chronicles, Ezra, and Nehemiah
were probably put together as one book by one
author about 300 b.c. i Chron. iii. 17-24 refers
to the sixth (or eleventh) generation after Zerub-
babel, and Neh. xii. 11 mentions Jaddua
(high priest 331 B.c.).
65
THE GREEK YOKE BROKEN.
Chronicles shows a hierarchy more elaborate and
more minutely graded than has before appeared
(among Aaronites, i Chron.xxiv.4,5, and Levites,
I Chron. xxiv. 31 ; xxv.; xxvi. 12, 13, 20, 26). Cf.
§ 21. It presents the earlier history of man¬
kind and of Israel as it was recounted by priests
living about 300 B.c., and offers an instructive
contrast to the Books of Kings, written three
centuries earlier. Since the Return, the Jews
became, though under Gentile supremacy, more
and more a hierocracy (or State ruled by the
priesthood), culminating in the high priest.
The peoples under Greek rule began to adopt
Greek speech, manners, and religion. This
process of Hellenization affected the Jews
also.
The Dispersion, or settlement of the Jews among
other nations, which dated from the Exile,
brought the Jews in touch with the Greek
princes and Greek culture ruling in the East ;
and Judaea, since 320 part of the Greek King¬
dom of Egypt, came in 205 under the Greek
Kingdom of Syria.
Antiochus Epiphanes, King of Syria, 175, after
putting his creatures into the high priest’s
office, resolved on completely Hellenizing the
Jews, and (168) prohibited, on pain of death,
the practice of the old Jewish rites. He placed
a small altar to Jupiter Capitolinus (“ the god
of fortresses,” Dan. xi. 38) on the altar of burnt
offering in the Temple (“abomination of deso¬
lation, Dan. xi. 31 j 1 Macc. i. 57)) and put a
Syrian garrison in the citadel to carry out his
I E
66
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
decrees (i Macc. i. 36 ; cf. Dan. vii. 20, 21, 25 ;
viii. 23-25 ; ix. 26, 27).
The powerful and wealthy and ambitious among
the Jews, who had already aped Greek ways,
obeyed the King (1 Macc. i. 45 ; Dan. xi. 32).
Here was one of the supreme crises in the history
of the Kingdom of God. Hellenism confronted
Hebraism : the grandest civilization of the
ancient world, backed by the power of the
Syrian monarchy, set itself to destroy the re¬
ligion of the poor and humble among the
Jews.
At this dark hour Mattathias and his five sons
(commonly called, from Judas Maccabeus, the
Maccabees) rose in revolt, rallied around them
the people, defeated army after army of the
Syrian king, and won freedom (162) and security
(141) for the Law-observing Jews. The Law
had saved the religion of Jehovah.
The stream of development which ran through
# Moses and the Prophets was not to be absorbed
by Hellenism ; later ages show that Hellenism
was to be absorbed by it.
The rising of the Maccabees, though only dimly referred
to in the Bible, is an event of the first importance.
1 Maccabees should be carefully read and remembered.
Focal Scene: The doings at Modein (1 Macc. ii.
14-28).
The little country town of Modein, filled with fugi¬
tives from persecution.
Mattathias and his sons in torn garments and sack¬
cloth, bewailing the plight of the Jews,
VISION OF THE REIGN OF HUMANITY. 67
Entry of Hellenist officer and soldiers from Anti-
ochus, with images of the Western Gods and
implements of sacrifice.
They erect an altar and command the people to
sacrifice.
Mattathias, commanded first, refuses (vers. 19-22).
Then enters an apostate Jew, prepared to sacrifice.
Mattathias falls upon him, slays him on the altar,
slays the Hellenist officer, pulls down the altar,
calls for followers, and escapes to the moun¬
tains.
Modem thus becomes one of the pivot spots in the
world’s history. The sword of Mattathias was
in its way one of the mightiest implements of
time.
Topic for discussion : Compare, for decisive effect
on the progress of the Kingdom of God, Sen-
nacherib’s sudden retreat from Jerusalem, the
victory of the Maccabees, and the defeat of the
Armada.
Request : That we may always set Conscience
above Culture.
§ 26. Vision of the Reign of Humanity.
Key-Text. There came with the clouds of Heaven
one like unto a son of man , . . . and there was
given him dominion and glory and a kingdom ,
that all the peoples , nations , and languages
should serve him ; his dominion is an everlast¬
ing dominion. —Dan. vii. 13, 14.
The Book of Daniel is one of the very greatest
of books. Its sublime ideas, though veiled in
68
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
weird riddles, make up a Divine philosophy of
history ; and few parts of the Old Testament
seem to have been more often present to the
mind of Jesus.
The time in Jewish history to which it points ap¬
pears in chap. xi. There are recounted the
reigns of the Persian kings (v. 2), the victories
of Alexander the Great (3), the division of his
empire among his generals (4), the wars between
the Kings of Egypt (“the South”) and Syria
(“the North”), and then with greater detail
the events leading up to, and marking the
course of, the reign of Antiochus Epiphanes.
including his profanation of the Temple {v. 31-
B.C. 168), and his devotion to the Romar
Jupiter (38/). Upon his death is expected tc
ensue the winding up of the world’s history (xii.)
The same story is more briefly told in viii. ; an/'
comparison with xi. seems to show that here
too, the seer’s vision of Eastern history does not
go beyond Antiochus Epiphanes (viii. 23-25).
Whence it follows that the range of time undei
survey in this book, prior to the great consum¬
mation, stretches from N ebuchadnezzar to An¬
tiochus Epiphanes. Chaps, xi. and viii. thus
give a key to the visions in ii. and vii., and it
is inferred that
Of the Colossus in ii., the golden head is the empire
of Chaldaea ; the silver bust, of Media ; the
brazen middle, of Persia ; the iron legs, of
Alexander; the iron and clay feet, of his Suc¬
cessors ; the stone cut out without hands, the
Kingdom of the God in Heaven :
VISION OF THE REIGN OR HUMANITY. 69
Of the animal forms in vii., the beast like an eagle¬
winged lion is the Chaldaean ; the beast like a
bear is the Median ; the beast like a leopard is
the Persian ; the fourth beast is the Macedonian
power; the ten horns are Alexander’s Suc¬
cessors or the Seleucidas; the little horn is
Antiochus Epiphanes ; and the form like a son
of man stands for “ the people of the saints of
the Most High” (the faithful Jews), as is ex¬
plained in verse 27,
Thus the Book was written for the time of the Mac-
cabean rising, and its tales of heroic constancy would
be then peculiarly helpful.
A large number of scholars maintain that the Book
was written not merely for , but at , that time, and that
the great message came at the great crisis, and not
400 years before.
It belonged to a kind of literature known as Apoc¬
alyptic. Later Apocalypses were written under
assumed names (Enoch, Moses, Baruch, Ezra) and
set forth in vision-form the course of history between
the dates of professed and of actual authorship. Was
this book an exception to the rule ?
Its leading thoughts are—
The Most High is sovereign disposer of human
history (ii. 21); His Kingdom is an everlasting
Kingdom (iv. 3, &c.) ; He ruleth in the kingdom
of men, and giveth it to whomsoever He will
(iv. 17, 35), to Nebuchadnezzar (v. 18), to the
Medes and Persians (v. 26, 28), and to their
successors, “ even to the lowest of men ” (iv.
17 ).
After these brutal powers (vii.) have ruled, at a
70
THE KINGDOM OP GOD.
time decreed beforehand (ix. 24-27), the judg¬
ment shall come (vii. 10), with resurrection and
recompense (xii. 2, 3). The God of Heaven
shall set up His Kingdom (ii. 44). It shall
consume all other Kingdoms (ii. 44), and shall
be given to the people of His saints (vii. 27).
It is a dominion extending over all nations, and
everlasting (vii. 14, 27). Its advent marks
the close of sin and the reign of everlasting
righteousness (ix. 24). In other words—
Upon a Divinely controlled succession of sinful
world-empires follows at last the universal and
eternal Kingdom of the people of the Most
High; a Kingdom which contrasts with all
previous kinds of rule as Man contrasts with
Beasts of prey; a Kingdom, that is, not of
brutality but of humanity ; the manifest King¬
dom of God.
The two ideas prominent in the Psalms, of a King'
dom already come and of a Kingdom yet to come,
are here reconciled.
The promised Kingdom did not immediately succeed
the Syrian monarchy : Rome came next. But, with
all allowance for “foreshortening,” note the actual
course of history: empires Babylonian, Medo-Persian,
Macedonian, Roman ; then—Christendom.
Topic for discussion : The progress of government
from the brutal to the human, shown in (a) the
successive maritime ascendencies of the Portu¬
guese, Spanish, Dutch, and English; (b) the
transition from despotism to democracy ;
and thought more of political status
than religious purity, their power waned.
Their alliance with Rome (160 b.c.) ended in
Judaea being conquered by Rome (63 b.c.), and
the people of Jehovah came under the yoke
of the last and greatest world-empire.
The caste of the chief priests, known as Sad-
DUCEES ( = Zadokites, cf. Ezek. xliv. 10-16), be¬
came a sort of time-serving peerage, outside
the main stream of religious development.
Opposed to them, and standing for the most
earnest life of Jewry, were
The Pharisees (Separatists), heirs of the Asid-
seans or Puritans, who had fought with the
Maccabees against Hellenism.
72 THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
As the power of the priests declined
The power of the Scribes increased. They were
the students, the interpreters, the teachers,
and the judges of the law. Their work pro¬
moted the twin processes of the amplification
and condensation of the Law.
Cases not met by the written Law were decided by
the Scribes. Fresh cases required fresh rules.
So arose a great mass of case-law. Much of
this was ascribed to Moses, from whom it was
said to have been orally transmitted through
the elders, and was known as “ the tradition of
the elders.”
I he pernicious idea which grew up under the
Written Law, that the Will of God can be
exhaustively set forth in a series of precise in¬
junctions, was developed by the Scribes to ?
fatal extreme. Life was gradually covereG
with a network of minute regulations. Reli*
gion tended to become only a slavish learning
and keeping of rules. (Give illustrations.;
This amplification became an intolerable yoke
of bondage. (Acts xv. io; Gal. v. i.) The
rind of the Law grew thicker and thicker with
a sort of fungus growth which threatened the
inner life.
At the same time, men sought to get at the pith of
the Law, to ascertain its central or supreme
principle.
To a Gentile promising to become a proselyte
if he could learn the entire Law whilst standing
on one foot, Hillel said, “ What is hated by thee
do not thou to thy neighbour. This is the
DEEPENING EXPECTANCY.
73
whole Law : all the rest is commentary to it”
(cf Matt. vii. 12).
Scribes discussed, Which is the great com¬
mandment ? (Mark xii. 28.)
The two greatest schools were those of Shammai,
the stricter, and Hillel, the gentler exponent
of the Law, who both flourished in the latter half
of the first century B.C.
Hillel s story and some of his sayings might be read to
the Class to show his place in the ethical movement
towards the Kingdom of God.
Thus the Scribes drilled the people into a strict and
scrupulous sense of duty.
Topic for discussion : The perils of Casuistry, and
young people’s weakness for it. *
Request : That we may be filled with the know¬
ledge of His will in all spiritual wisdom (Col.
i. 9).
§ 28. Deepening Expectancy.
Key-Texts. A man . . . looking for the consola¬
tion of Israel. . . . All . . . that were looking
for the redemption of ferusalem .—Luke ii.
25 > 38
Along with a closer study of the Law and of the
Tradition of the Elders, prevailed a more
earnest and expectant longing for the appear¬
ing of the Kingdom of God. Reference may
be here made to books outside the Cano*; as
follows ;—
74
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
The Book of Tobit, which belongs to the last two
centuries B.C., foretells (xiv. 5-7) that, on the re¬
building of the Temple, all the nations shall turn
in sincerity to the fear of Jehovah the Lord, and
bury their idols and praise Jehovah.
The Psalms of Solomon (said to be composed 63 48 B.C.)
repudiate the usurping princes (Maccabean dynasty.
Ps. Sol. xvii.), exult over Pompey’s death (ii.), and
hope for a sinless King of David’s line, the Lord’s
Anointed, whom Jehovah will make strong by the
Holy Spirit. He will rule over Israel and the heathen
nations. In His days there shall be no unrighteous¬
ness, for all shall be saints xvii.). The dispersed
shall be gathered (xi.), and the just who have died
shall be raised from the dead (xiv.).
In the Book o*f Enoch, the allegories supposed to belong
to the time of Herod the Great expect a “ Chosen
One,” a “ Son of Man,” the Revealer, the Supremely
Righteous One, to be manifested shortly, to judge
the world, dethrone the kings, and set up His
Kingdom. Then shall be resurrection and recom
pense, sin shall be named no more for ever, and aD
evil shall vanish. The chosen people shall abide
with the Son of Man for ever and ever.
The typical and impersonal figure in Daniel, “one
like unto a son of man ’’—has now become personal.
In the Assumption of Moses, Moses foretells to Joshua
events up to about 4 B.C. Then God’s Kingdom will
appear throughout His whole creation. The devil
and sorrow shall have an end. The alone Eternal
will destroy all idols, chastise the heathen, and
exalt Israel.
REVIEW OF POST-PROPHETIC PERIOD. 75
Topic for discussion : Compare these Jewish apoc¬
alypses with the modern apocalyptic novel
(e.g, Bellamy’s “ Looking Backwards,”) as
varying forms of Social Forecast.
Request : Prophetic Spirit! that inspir’st
The human Soul of universal earth,
Dreaming on things to come . . .
. . . upon me bestow
A gift of genuine insight.
(Cf. John xvi. 13.)
§ 29. Review of Post-prophetic Period.
The period after the prophets may be divided into
three sub-periods :—
(i.) Medo-Persian till 332 B.C.;
(ii.) Greek, 332-64 : (a) Egyptian to 205 ; ( b)
Syrian to 64. Since 165 the Syrian sway
over the Jews was largely nominal;
(iii.) Roman, from 64 B.c. forward : (a) unsettled
64-37; (d) Herod the Great, 37-4 B.c.
During this period the hope of the Kingdom of
God had been diffused throughout the religious
commonalty. It was no longer the rare intui¬
tion of a few souls. It had become the heritage
of the multitude.
Little was added to the contents of the hope as
bequeathed by the prophets, to its beauty or
ethical riches; but
Greater stress was laid on certain elements in the
hope, viz.,
;6
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
(1) The universality and eternity of the King¬
dom. (Contrast Amos ix. and Dan. vii.
14, 27.)
(2) Its transcendent (supernatural) character ;
its accomplishment by means of sudden
(miraculous) interposition from above.
(3) Resurrection, judgment, recompense.
(4) A single supernaturally-endowed super¬
human pre-existent Man looked to as Inaugu-
rator of the New Order; no longer a
Davidic line of Kings, but one Person;
notably after the Apocalypse of Daniel.
Carefully read over again § 20 Review of the Prophetic Ideal ,
and compare with the present review
Combining in one view the hope and practice oi
the Jews in this period, we observe from the
standpoint of the New Testament :—
I.—(Permanent elements.) The Kingdom of God
is eternal and universal,
is established on the earth
at a time fixed in the all-ruling purpose of God,
by a holy people, Israel having first repented,
been atoned-for, and forgiven,
by a line of Divinely-endowed Davidic rulers,
or
by one Divinely-endowed Person, most fre¬
quently called Messiah or Christ, also Son
of God, Son of Man, Son of David, Chosen
One of God.
It is an order to which (what moderns call) Nature
is absolutely subservient ; in which
REVIEW OF POST-PROPHETIC PERIOD. 77
Death is repealed for the righteous if not for
all ; and in which
Recompense (judgment) is meted out to both
righteous and unrighteous.
It is pervaded by a Righteousness which brings
the life of every member down to its minutest
details into accord with a
Divine Law, which, with all its infinite complexity
and comprehensiveness, can yet be reduced to
a single principle, variously stated as devoted
love to God ( cf. Deut.), or negative sympathy
with one’s neighbour. (Hillel : “ What you
don’t like yourself, don’t do to your neigh¬
bour.”)
/I. —(Temporary elements.) The foregoing concep¬
tion was wrapped in a husk of
1. Sacerdotalism, which, at the end of the
period, was decaying, the Sadducean priests
having profaned their office by political sel¬
fishness;
2. Legalism, which was very strong, the Scribes
being then (at end of period) at the height of
their power
3. Fanatical and exclusive Nationalism, which
was, perhaps, the strongest of all .
This regarded the emancipation of Israel
and the establishment of his worldly power
and glory, along with the overthrow and
abasement of all his enemies as the most
important and characteristic feature in the
lining Kingdom of God ; and
4. a wild Supernaturalism {cf the Apocalypses).
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
*8
§ 30. Closing Survey of PART FIRST.
Key-Text. So is the Kingdom of God \ as if a
man should cast seed upon the earth. . .
First the blade , then the ear , then the full corn
in the ear. —Mark iv. 26, 28.
In beginning our study, we found (§ 2), that the
Kingdom of God was spoken of by Jesus as an
idea already familiar to the people. To be in a
position to understand His teaching about the
Kingdom, it was thus necessary to know what
the Jewish idea was, and to trace its growth,
therefore, through the past “beginning from
Moses.” We have watched the chief stages in
the disclosure of the Kingdom of God in Israel;
we have seen the Social Ideal foreshadowed
with increasing clearness in the National State.
Now that we have reached the close of PART
FIRST, and before we go on to ask how Jesus
took up or laid aside the thoughts of His
countrymen concerning the Kingdom, it is
advisable to glance back over the whole of the
way we have come. The sections §§ 1-29
should all be read again ; but special attention
should be fixed upon three :
§ 5. The National Type of the Kingdom as
given under David.
§ 20. Summary view of the Prophetic Ideal ;
and
§ 29. The post-Prophetic preparation.
CLOSING SURVEY OF PART FIRST.
79
1 hese the teacher may readily combine into one
expanding view of the pre-Christian develop¬
ment.
In place ot the usual discussion, members of the
Class may state in turn what has most impressed
them in following this course of study through
the Old Testament.
7 hanksgiving : For the Divine Life revealed to
us through the Law and the Prophets.
TURNBULL AND SPEARS, PRINTERS, EDINBURGH.
I
Kade^v
orazin
Qaba,ra
M 1 . Carmel
\Xebriloh. farw
Kettyfhsm,
r+yfa6 / - aw^j* /»#/«/.»
^- ' {g&fLysgju. w /*«-
Alevatuiroj,
Xoru/itude £&st or br^&iwibh.
Bible Class primers.
EDITED BY PRINCIPAL SALMOND, D.D., ABERDEEN
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
A PLAN OF STUDY
IN THREE PARTS,
I.—The Kingdom in Israel.
IL—The Kingdom in the Synoptic Sayings of Jesus.
HI. —The Kingdom in Apostolic Times.
F. HERBERT STEAD, M.A.,
AUTHOR OF “ A HANDBOOK ON YOUNG PEOPLE’S GUILDS.”
If.—THE KINGDOM IN THE SYNOPTIC
SAYINGS OF JESUS.
Sbinbuvgh:
T. & T. CLARK, 38 GEORGE STREET.
Printed in Great Britain
by Turnbull Shears, Edinburgh
CONTENTS
part Secottfc:
THE KINGDOM IN THE SYNOPTIC SAYINGS
of Jesus, §§ 31-74.
Sources and Method, § 31. The Gradual Unfold¬
ing, § 32.
Collective Statement, §§ 33-73
Fulfilment and Repeal, § 33.
A. The God whose is the Kingdom, §§ 34-39
The Supreme Unity, § 34. The Creator and
Disposer, § 35. The God of Revelation, § 36.
The All-Perfect Father, § 37. The Father in
His Family, § 38. The Dread Awarder, § 39.
B. The Subjects of the Kingdom, §§ 40-44 . . ig . 29
Who may be Subjects, § 40. Relation of Subjects
to God (Religion), § 41. Relation of Subjects to
each other (Morality), § 42. The Law of the
Brotherhood, § 43. Its Unity, § 44.
PAGE
7-63
13-62
I4-I9
C. The Christ, §§ 45-52.
His Titles, § 45. “ The Son of Man,” § 46. The
Anointed Ruler, § 47. His General Relation to
the Kingdom, § 48. His Relation to the Father,
§ 49 - His Relation to the Subjects, § 50. The
Death of the Christ, § 51. Summary of C , § 52.
30G7
6
CONTENTS.
PAGE
D. When and How the Kingdom Comes, §§ 53-57 . 48-50
The Present Kingdom, § 53. The Future
Kingdom, § 54. The Law of Growth (or
Evolution), § 55. The Process of Growth, § 56.
The Means of Growth, § 57.
E. Where the Kingdom comes, §§ 58-66 . . . 51-57
Here as yonder, § 58. In Nature, § 59. In Man:
his Body, § 60. His worldly goods, § 61. The
Home, § 62. The State, § 63. The Heart of
Man, § 64. The Realm of “Saving Health,”
§ 65. Its various reception, § 66.
F. The LAST THINGS, §§ 67-73.58-62
Death no bar to Life, § 67. The Life beyond
Death, § 68. The Day of Judgment, § 69.
Whom the Kingdom excludes, § 70. Whom it
receives, § 71. The Doom, § 72. The Meed,
173 -
Summary of Synoptic Sayings: What is the
Gospel as Jesus preached it? § 74 . . . .63.78
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
SECOND PART.
THE KINGDOM AS SET FORTH IN THE
SAYINGS OF JESUS,
Which are found in the Synoptic Gospels.
§ 31. Sources and Method.
Our Sources of information are in the first
instance the books named after Matthew, Mark,
and Luke, or together called Synoptics. How
these gospels arose, and how they stand to each
other, may now be explained to the Class. One
widely-accepted explanation may be given here by
way of example.
By comparing Luke (say ix. 23 ff) with Mark
(viii. 34 ff), and Matthew (xvi. 24 ff.) with Mark
{Ibid.) • we find that both Luke and Matthew appear
to draw from Mark, while Mark gives every sign
of being original. Thus
Mark is one source of both Matthew and
Luke.
But Luke and Matthew contain much in common
which is not in Mark {cf. Luke vii. 18 ff. ; Matt. xi.
8
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
iff.). This common part is nearly all made up of
the sayings of Jesus, or narrative introductions to
His sayings. Hence we infer
A common source of Luke and Matthew
in a Collection of sayings.
Papias, one of the Apostolic Fathers (d. 162 a.d.), says
the Apostle Matthew compiled the oracles or sayings of
our Lord.
From these two sources (Mark and Collected
Speeches) known to us, and from other sources not
known to us,
Luke and Matthew were independently
compiled.
Luke, whether earlier than Matthew or not, seems
to have giouped or arranged the sayings of Jesus
less than Matthew, and hence to contain these say¬
ings more nearly as they were found in the first
sources. So in Luke we seem to get nearer to the
original words of Jesus than in Matthew.
It follows from this analysis that
Mark is the earliest history of Jesus we
possess.
Our method is to go carefully over the sayings of
Jesus lecorded in the Synoptic gospels, noting all
that bears on the Kingdom of God. We shall use
the three narratives as we go ; but with discrimina¬
tion of earlier and later, of once or twice or thrice
attested. Two simple
Rules of Comparison may be given : the sources
being otherwise equal.
SOURCES AND METHOD.
9
(1) Two are better than one; . . . and a threefold
cord is not quickly broken (Eccles. iv. 9, 12).
(2) Nearer the time , nearer the truth.
This is the great Canon of Criticism. Contemporary
evidence is of most value: the longer the period
between the record and the events recorded, the less
valuable the record. But neither rule is absolute.
Take an example of the help these rules furnish.
We learn by comparing our Gospels that “ Kingdom
of God” and “ Kingdom of Heaven” are used
to denote the same thing.
But which is the regular title ?
Both may have been used by Jesus ; but which in
all probability did He use most often ?
“ Kingdom of Heaven ” is found in only one source
—Matthew.
“ Kingdom of God ” is found in all three sources—
Mark and Luke, and also Matthew (xii. 28 ; xix.
24 ; xxi. 31, 43 ; cf. vi. 10 ; xiii. 43 ; xxvi. 29).
Therefore, by Rule 1, we conclude that the “ Kingdom
of God ” is the regular title. Rule 2 warrants the same
conclusion. This settles our usage.
How “ Kingdom of Heaven ” came to be synonym
for “ Kingdom of God ” may be inferred from
(1) The phrases “King of Heaven” (Dan. iv. 37),
“ Lord of Heaven ” (Dan. v. 23), and “ God of
Heaven ” (common in Ezra and Daniel). “ The
God of Heaven shall set up a kingdom”
(Dan. ii. 44). “Heaven is the throne of God”
(Matt. v. 34; Isa. lxvi. 1). “Heavenly Father,”
“ Father in Heaven ” (passim). “ Thy kingdom
IO
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
come ... as in Heaven so on earth” (Matt. vi.
io).
(2) “ Heaven ” is used as other name for “ God,” in
Dan. iv. 26, “ The Heavens do rule ” ; Pirqe
Abhoth i. 2, “ The fear of Heaven ” ; in Luke
xv. 18, “I have sinned against Heaven.”
The order of research is first to trace the Idea of the
Kingdom as it is gradually unfolded in the teachings of
Jesus, and then to gather the knowledge thus gained into a
systematic statement.
But in Class the two processes may well go on side by
side. The first half of the hour may be spent on the
Gradual Unfolding, the second half on a section, taken in
consecutive order, of the Collective Statement. The
Teacher would best undertake the conduct of the succes¬
sive exposition of Jesus’ sayings : the collective section
may be assigned in turn to one or other member of the
Class, and discussed by all. Thus
The Order might be
Short prayer, including the “ Request.”
Exposition by the Teacher of the Sayings in their
Gradual Unfolding.
Section of Collective Statement expanded and pre¬
sented by a member of the Class.
Discussion.
Benediction.
Request: For the Spirit of truth, who shall take
of the things of Jesus and declare them unto us
(John xvi. 13 /).
§ 32. The Gradual Unfolding.
Key-Text. He learned obedience by the things
which He suffered. —Heb. v. 8.
THE GRADUAL UNFOLDING.
ii
We are now to give a general sketch of the principal
stages in Jesus’ teaching.
Period A.— The Kingdom Announced.
Jesus as The Son of Man (Mark ii. io, 28) announces
within the Old Society the Kingdom of God
(Mark i. 15 ; Luke iv. 43 5 Matt. iv - J 7 )- Though
the people receive Him joyfully (Mark i. 16-45 »
iii. 7-12), the religionists oppose Him (Mark ii.
6,16, 18, 24), and plot His death (Mark iii. 6).
(References to three gospels only at beginning of
periods ; elsewhere generally only to Mark.)
Period B.— The Kingdom Planted.
Jesus founds the New Society (Mark iii. 13 -*9 5 Luke
vi. 12-19 ; Matt. x. 1-4),
He unfolds its nature and laws in the Sermon on
the Mount (plain) (Luke vi. 20-49 ; Matt. v.
—vii.),
He tells also the manner of its growth in a series
of parables (Mark iv. 1-34 ; Luke viii. 4-18 ;
xiii. 18-21 ; Matt. xiii. 1-50).
He breaks with the Old Society as represented
by the home-circle (Mark. iii. 20 f), the
Scribes from Jerusalem (iii. 22-30), the
Nazarenes (vi. 1-6), and by the laws of clean
and unclean meats (vii. 15 ff-)'
During these two periods, A and B, Jesus makes no
distinct or certain reference to His passion. His own
Person slowly moves into the foreground of His teaching.
Period C.— The Christ Acknowledged and
Foredoomed.
Jesus is declared to be the Christ (Mark viii. 27 ff ;
Luke ix. 18 ff. ; Matt. xvi. 13^), foretells His
12
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
passion, resurrection, and coming in glory
(Mark viii. 31 f; ix. 12, 30 and lays great
stress on the duty of self-denial, humility, re¬
gard for the helpless, and general detachedness
from the world and self—“ Die to live”—Mark
viii. yff .; ix. 33/, 43^, &c.
His Person now assumes decisive importance
(Mark viii. 34 ; cf Luke x. 22 ; Matt. xi. 27-30).
In this period Jesus does not explain to them His
death.
Period D.— The Redeemer King.
Jesus declares His death to be vicarious (Mark
x. 32-45 ; Matt. xx. 17-28), and sacrificial (Mark
xiv. 12-25, &c.) ;
Pie assumes a royal dignity (Mark x. 32—xi. 33);
He unfolds the world-wide scope of His Gospel
(Mark xiii. 10), and the future of His
Kingdom (Mark xiii.) ;
He accepts the titles of the Christ, the Son of
God, the King of the Jews (Mark xiv.
53-65 ; xv. 1-5) ;
He dies, rises again, is endued with all authority,
and sends His followers to make disciples
of all the nations, (Mark xv., xvi .; Luke
xxiii., xxiv. ; Matt, xxvii., xxviii.).
Request : That from the experience of life we may,
like our Master, learn to obey.
FULFILMENT AND REPEAL.
13
THE COLLECTIVE STATEMENT OF THE
SYNOPTIC SAYINGS
CONCERNING THE KINGDOM.
We pass now to consider
§ 33. Fulfilment and Repeal.
Key-Text. “ I came not to destroy but to fulfil n
the Law and the prophets.—Matt. v. 17.
It is everywhere manifest that Jesus regards His
mission, history, and Kingdom as fulfilment of
the purpose of God expressed in the Hebrew
Scriptures {eg, Luke iv. 21 ; Mark ix. 12 ; Luke
xviii. 31 ; Mark xiv. 21 ; Luke xxii. 37 ; xxiv.
25 ff., 44, cf. § 2).
His Kingdom in fulfilling this purpose of God tran¬
scends that which has gone before (Luke xi.
31 f ; Matt. xii. 41 f ); he that is but little in
the Kingdom of God is greater than the greatest
of his predecessors (Luke vii. 28 ; Matt. xi. n).
He finds in the Law of Israel provisions granted
“ for the hardness of your hearts ” and not of
permanent Divine appointment (Mark x. 5 ;
Matt. xix. 8).
Accordingly His fulfilment of Hebrew Scriptures
often becomes equal to REVERSAL or RE¬
PEAL (Mark x. 9 ; Matt. xix. 6 ff. ; Matt. v.
3 i/v 33 i^> 38 ^, 43 f \ Mark iii. 35 5 Luke viii.
21 ; Matt. xii. 50; Mark vii. 15; Matt. xv. 11).
Hence we have the important
Rule : Whatsoever in the Old Testament pre¬
paration is in accord with the teachings or
spirit of Jesus may abide as a permanent
14
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
element in the idea of the Kingdom of God :
But whatsoever is at variance with the teach¬
ings or spirit of Jesus, though not expressly
repealed by Him, must be given up.
Examples of both kinds may be cited here and discussed.
Request : That by loyally fulfilling the past we
may bring in a better future.
A.—The God Whose is the Kingdom.
Jesus teaches
§ 34. The Supreme Unity.
God is one (Mark xii. 29); the Highest (Luke vi.
35 );
He is omnipotent: all things are possible to
Him (Mark x. 27; ‘Matt. xix. 26; Mark
xiv. 36) ;
He is prescient and presumably omniscient: He
knows the else quite unknown future (Mark
xiii. 32 ; Matt. xxiv. 36); the hearts of men
(Luke xvi. 15) ; our wants before we tell
Him (Matt. vi. 8 ; Luke xii. 30 ; Matt. vi.
32); He forgets not a single sparrow (Luke
xii. 6); He seeth in secret (Matt. vi. 4) ;
is in secret (Matt. vi. 6)— i.e., is no object of our
senses.
Wisdom is His (Luke xi. 49), and glory (Mark
viii. 38).
Request : For faith to believe always and intensely
that God is (Heb. xi. 6).
THE GOD OF REVELATION.
15
§ 35. The Creator and Disposer.
God created the creation (Mark xiii. 19).
He is Lord of heaven and earth (Luke x. 21;
Matt. xi. 25).
Heaven is His throne and earth His footstool (Matt.
v. 34 f y xxiii. 22).
He is in Heaven {passim).
Angels are His (Luke xii. 8) in untold numbers to
do His bidding (Matt. xxvi. 53).
He makes the sun to rise and the rain to fall (Matt.
v. 45).
He clothes the grass of the field and with more
glory than Solomon’s (Luke xii. 28 ; Matt. vi. 30).
He feeds the ravens (Luke xii. 24), the birds of the
heaven (Matt. vi. 26 ); not a sparrow is for¬
gotten by Him (Luke xii. 6), or falls to the
ground without Him (Matt. x. 29).
He made man male and female, and created the
unity of marriage (Mark x. 6 ff. ; Matt. xix. \ff).
He gives us our daily bread (Luke xi. 3 ; Matt.
vi. 11).
He counts the hairs of our heads (Luke xii. 7 ;
Matt. x. 30).
He shortens the days— i.e., controls the course of
history (Mark xiii. 20).
Request : “ My times be in Thy hand ! ”
§ 36. The God of Revelation.
He is Jehovah (LORD) (Mark xin 29 ; xiii. 20 ; v.
19), God of the living Abraham, Isaac, and
Jacob (Mark xii. 26 f ; Luke xx. 37 f ; Matt,
xxii. 32 /.).
i6
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
He spoke to Moses (Mark xii. 26) ; the law of Moses
was His commandment, His word (Mark vii.
9-13; Matt. xv. 4).
His wisdom sent prophets and apostles (Luke xi.
49 )-
Jerusalem is the city of the great King (Matt. v. 53).
He is (obviously) the Lord of the (theocratic) vine¬
yard, who sent many servants to receive its
fruit (Mark xii. 9 ; Luke xx. 13 ; Matt. xxi. 40).
He sent Jesus (Mark ix. 37 ; Luke ix. 48; x. 16)
His Son (Mark xii. 6; Luke xx. 13; Matt,
xxi. 37).
He is the Father of Jesus (passim).
By His Spirit (called also His finger) Jesus casts
out demons (Luke xi. 20; Matt. xii. 28 ; also
Mark v. 19 ; Luke viii. 39).
He alone knows the Son and has delivered all
things into His hands (Luke x. 22 ; Matt. xi.
27) has appointed Him a Kingdom (Luke xxii.
29), and has prepared the next in honour to
Him (Matt. xx. 23).
He is alone known by the Son and by those to
whom the Son wills to reveal Him (Luke x. 22 ;
Matt. vi. 27).
Request : For a spirit of wisdom and revelation in
the knowledge of Him (Eph. i. 17).
Jesus accordingly reveals Him as
§ 37. The All Perfect Father.
He is Father, Abba (Luke xi. 2, in Lord’s Prayer ;
Mark xiv. 36, at Gethsemane).
The instinctive and habitual cry of Jesus was not
THE ALL-PERFECT FA TLIER.
17
“Our Father” ( Abhuna ), or “My Father”
(Abbi), but, as carried over even into Gentile
Churches, “ Father” (Abba), (Gal. iv. 6 ; Rom.
viii. 15).
He is “your Father” (to the disciples, Mark xi. 25,
el passim).
He is “ your Father,” as is no man on earth (to the
multitudes, Matt, xxiii. 9).
Whatever is good in earthly fathers is “ much more ”
in Him (Luke xi. 13 ; Matt. vii. 11).
“Your good works” cause men to glorify Him
(Matt. v. 16).
He is the alone good (Mark x. 18 ; Luke xviii. 19;
Matt. xix. 17).
He is seen (only) by the pure in heart (Matt. v. 8).
He is merciful (Luke vi. 36).
Peacemaking, love of one’s enemies, generosity
without let or stint, when displayed by man,
are only filial resemblances to the far exceeding
benevolence of God (Luke vi. 27-36; Matt. v.
38-48 ; v. 9).
He is perfect (Matt. v. 48).
His will above all else ought to be done (Matt. vi.
10; vii. 21; Mark xiv. 36; Luke xxii. 42;
Matt. xxvi. 39) : the doing of His will out¬
weighs in worth everything else (Matt. vii. 21;
Mark iii. 35 ; Luke xi. 28 ; viii. 21 ; Matt,
xii. 50).
Instead of the usual Request, let the class unite in
the Lord’s Prayer.
2
B
THE KINGDOM OF GOD
18
§ 38. The Father in His Family.
He clothes the grass, feeds the ravens, forgets not a
sparrow, but much more provides for “ you ”
(Luke xii. 6 ff; Matt. vi. 26 ff.).
He knows your wants (Luke xii. 30 ; Matt. vi. 32).
He is kind to the unthankful and evil (Luke vi. 35).
He sends sun and rain on the evil and the good
(Matt. v. 45).
He bestows forgiveness of sins (Luke xi. 4 ; Matt,
vi. 12 ; Mark xi. 25 ; Luke xxiii. 34) only on
those who forgive (Matt, xviii. 23^ ; vi. 14, 15). f
He is the loving Father who welcomes the prodigal
(Luke xv. 11 ff.).
It is not His will that “one of these little ones”
should perish (Matt, xviii. 14).
He more justifies the penitent publican than the
Pharisee (Luke xviii. 14).
It is His good pleasure to hide “these things ” from
the wise and to reveal them unto babes (Luke
x. 21 ; Matt. xi. 25), also to give to “you little
flock ” the Kingdom (Luke xii. 32).
He has His elect whom He hath chosen (Mark xiii
20 \ Luke xviii. 7).
He is the object of faith (Mark xi. 22).
He is the hearer of prayer (Luke xi. iff. ; Matt. vi.
9 ff') i in answer to prayer gives the Holy Spirit
(Luke xi. 13), good gifts (Matt. vii. 11), daily
bread, forgiveness, guidance, deliverance from
sin (Luke xi. 2 ff. ; Matt. vi. 9 ff), sends
labourers into harvest (Luke x. 2 ; Matt. ix. 38),
grants anything agreed on by “ two of you ”
(Matt, xviii. 19).
THE DREAD AWARDER. 19
His Spirit speaks in those who are brought to trial
for Jesus’ sake (Matt. x. 20).
He brings or does not bring into temptation (Luke
xi, 4 ; Matt. vi. 13).
Request : That we may be ever made to feel at
home with God.
§ 39. The Dread Awarder.
He will reward unobtrusive righteousness (Matt,
vi. 1), almsgiving (vi. 4), prayer (vi. 6), and
fasting (vi. 18).
To deny the resurrection is to ignore His power
(Mark xii. 24; Matt. xxii. 29).
He blesses the heirs of the eternal Kingdom
(Matt. xxv. 34).
He punishes and forgives not those who do not
forgive (Matt, xviii. 35).
He will avenge His own elect (Luke xviii. 7).
He will destroy the husbandmen (of Israel) who
slay His Son (Mark xii. 9 ; Luke xx. 16).
He has power to kill and cast into Gehenna
(Luke xii. 5), to destroy therein both soul and
body (Matt. x. 28).
He is therefore to be feared {ibid.).
Request : For a love that is reverence and awe
(Heb. xii. 28 ; 1 John iv. 18).
B.—The Subjects of the Kingdom.
The words “ The Kingdom of God,” both in the
Aramaic, which Jesus spoke, and in the Greek of
the New Testament, mean literally “the Royal
20
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
Rule of God.” They are sometimes used (as
we have seen, §§ 24, 26) in the Old Testament
of the eternal sovereignty of God,—His govern¬
ment, throughout all time, of every part of His
creation. But they are chiefly used, both in the
Old and New Testaments, in a narrower though
richer sense. The preparation in Israel has
shown us that the Kingdom of God is not
merely a Divine Reign or Government or Order
or a spiritual condition ; but also the Royal
Rule of God realized at least to some extent in
the responsive attitude of subjects ; a common¬
wealth therefore, or society or fellowship of
Souls (the people of Jehovah with or without
subject races). As such it contains citizens or
subjects who have a certain status or character,
and stand in certain relations to God, to each
other, and to the Christ.
§ 40. Who may be Subjects.
Jesus, sent to proclaim the Kingdom of God (Luke
iv. 43), came to call sinners (Mark ii. 17 ; Luke
v. 32 ; Matt. ix. 13); came to seek and to save
that which was lost (Luke xix. 10).
Such persons, in order to enter the Kingdom, which
is thus a Kingdom of Salvation, must
Repent and believe in the good news of its advent
(Mark i. 14, 15; Matt. iv. 17; so Luke xiii.
[Carefully distinguish—
repent (Greek meta-noein ),
WHO MA Y BE SUBJECTS.
21
Wiclif, for-think, “change purpose,” from—
regret , Greek meta-melesthai^ “rue.”
Cf 2 Cor. vii. 8 -n, R.V.]
Possess a righteousness exceeding that of the
Scribes and Pharisees (Matt. v. 20), and do the
Will of the Father (Matt. vii. 21).
Turn and become as a little child (Matt, xviii. 3),
receive the kingdom as a little child (Mark x.
15 ; Luke xviii. 16, 17 ; cf. John iii. 3, 5 ; Luke
x. 21 ; Matt. xi. 25).
Deny self, take up their cross and follow the
Christ (Mark viii. 34; Lukeix.23; Matt.xvi.24);
cut off offending hand or foot (Mark ix. 43
Matt, xviii. 8 ff .);
renounce all that they have (Luke xiv. 33);
Lose their life for Jesus’ sake, and so save it
(Mark viii. 35; Luke ix. 24; Matt. xvi. 25;
cf. John xii. 25.)
When Jesus first said, Let a man “take up his cross,”
His death had been foretold, but not a death on the cross.
The phrase had thus no explicit reference to the form of
Jesus’ death. To take up your cross meant simply to be
on the point of going from the hall of judgment to the
place of crucifixion (John xix. 17), to be prepared for in¬
stant execution—in modern parlance, to put the halter
round your neck and begin your 7 narch to the gallows. But
crucifixion was a much more ignominious death than hang¬
ing* Such utter preparedness for the worst of loss and
dishonour was demanded by Jesus.
Compare the corresponding members of the pairs of
conditions:—
Repent Believe in the Good News.
Exceed conventional right- Do the Will of the Father,
eousness
22
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Turn
Deny self
Lose life for His sake
Become as little children.
Receive as a little child.
Follow the Christ.
Save it.
Thus must they enter by the strait gate and narrow
way (Luke xiii. 24 ; Matt. vii. 13 f).
The Kingdom is already possessed by
Children and the childlike (Mark x. 14 ; Luke
xviii. 16 ; Matt. xix. 14);
“Ye poor 7 ’ (Luke vi. 20 ; cf. Matt. v. 3 ; Mark
x. 23, 25).
Them that have been persecuted for righteousness 7
sake (Matt. v. 10).
The Kingdom, while admitting Israelites, is not
limited to Israel, for it shall entertain not only
Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, and all the prophets,
but also
Many from North, South, East, West (Luke xiii.
28 /.; Matt. viii. 11); and, taken away from the
Jews, shall be given to a
Nation bringing forth the fruits thereof (Matt. xxi.
43 )-
It is meant to include all the nations (Luke xxiv.
47 ; Matt, xxviii. 19). For
Whosoever shall do the will of Gcd is of the Christ’s
kindred (Mark iii. 35 ; Luke viii. 2J ; Matt,
xii. 50).
Request : Turn Thou us unto Thee, O Lord, and
we shall be turned (Lam. v. 21).
RELATION OF SUBJECTS TO GOD.
23
§ 41. Relation of Subjects to God.
(RELIGION.)
A. —Receptive.
They are God’s children : He is their Father (Matt,
xxiii. 9 ; see § 37.)
By Him they are given the Kingdom (Luke xii. 32).
By Him their sins are forgiven (Matt, xviii. 23 ff.\
vi. 14).
By Him they are supplied with food and clothing
(Luke xii. 22 ff.\ Matt. vi. 26 ff .);
with guidance (Luke xi. 4 ; Matt. vi. 13);
with good gifts (Matt. vii. n);
with the Holy Spirit (Luke xi. 13).
B. —Responsive.
They are accordingly to cherish towards God
Faith (Mark xi. 22) for the supply of their needs
(Matt. vi. 8), for the removal of mountains
(Mark xi. 23 ; Luke xvii. 6; Matt. xxi. 21), for
answer to prayer (Mark xi. 24 ; Matt. xxi. 22).
Fear (Luke xii. 5 ; Matt. x. 28) ;
Obedience; doing His will (Matt. vi. 10; vii. 21;
Mark iii. 35, &c.), being His servants (Luke
xvii. 10), keeping His commandments (Matt. v.
19 ; xix. 17 ; Luke x. 28); all which relations
are summed up in
LOVE, supreme and complete (Mark xii. 28 ff.\
Luke x. Matt. xxii. 35^), and
Imitation of His moral perfectness (Luke vi. 36 ;
Matt. v. 48).
So religion passes into morality.
24
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
0.—Reciprocal.
These mutual relations are to find expression in
Prayer (Luke xi. Matt. vii. 7 which is
unostentatious and in secret (Matt. vi. 6), yet may
be concerted (Matt, xviii. 19),
no oft-repeated gabbling (Matt. vi. 7),
trustful (Matt. vi. 8),
believing (expectant) (Mark xi. 24 ; Matt. xxi. 22),
weariless and persistent (Luke xviii. 1 ff.), and aftei
the manner of the
LORD'S FRA YER
Shorter Version.
Luke xi. 2 ff.
Father,
Hallowed be Thy Name.
Thy Kingdom come.
Give us day by day our
daily bread.
And forgive us our sins,
For we ourselves also for¬
give every one that is
indebted to us.
And bring us not into
temptation.
Longer.
Matt. vi. 9 ff.
Our Father which art in
Heaven,
Hallowed be Thy name.
Thy Kingdom come :
Thy Will be done,
As in Heaven, so on earth.
Give us this day our daily
bread.
And forgive us our debts,
As we also have forgiven
our debtors.
And bring us not
temptation,
But deliver us from evil
into
The two versions are mutually explanatory. The
additional clauses in Matthew are not so much
new petitions'as expansions and explanations of
the petitions found in both Luke and Matthew.
RELA TION Of SUBJECTS TO EACH OTHER. 25
Thus Thy Kingdom Come involves Thy Will done
ON EARTH as in Heaven —a fact too often for¬
gotten.
A later section will treat of the relation of subjects
to the Christ.
Request : Lord, teach us to pray (Luke xi. 1).
§ 42. Relation of Subjects to each Other.
(MORALITY.)
They form one Brotherhood ; are all brethren,
having one Father and one Teacher (Matt,
xxiii. 8, 9), and
being brethren of the Christ the King (Matt,
xxv. 40, 45 ; Mark iii. 35 ; Luke viii. 21 ; Matt,
xii. 50).
Hence each one possesses dread worth and
sanctity.
though only “one of these little ones ” (Mark
ix. 42 ; Matt. x. 42 ; xviii. 6, 10, 14), nay, even
“one of the least of these” (Matt. xxv. 40, 45).
Aught that men do or fail to do to “ one of these
least,” is done or not done to the Christ the
King and to His Father (Mark ix. 37 ; Luke
ix. 48 ; Matt, xviii. 5 ; xxv. 31 ffi), and
receives judgment accordingly (Mark. ix. 41,
42 ; Luke xvii. 2 ; Matt. x. 42 ; xxv. 46).
Yet each soul, however great his worth, must set
far less value on himself than on the Kingdom,
and must be ready, if need be, to sacrifice him¬
self completely for it (Mark viii. 35 ; Luke ix.
24 ; Matt. xvi. 25 ; Luke xiv. 26 ; Matt. x. 38
f) —the law of self-sacrifice.
26
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Contrast this self-sacrifice with a thing too often put in
its place,—a self-effacement that springs out of weak
or amiable compliance with the whims or wishes of
others and that sacrifices along with oneself the
Kingdom also.
Request : “ Bind each to each and all to Thee.”
§ 43. The LAW of the Brotherhood.
This Law touches not merely the outer act, but
far more the inner spirit (Mark vii. 21 ff.\ Matt,
xv. 19).
It is not a statute-book, but a conscience. Its precepts
are not a series of Divine Acts of Parliament; they
are points marking the line taken spontaneously by
the imperative of true life (by “the Inward Must”).
Thus the sayings of Jesus set forth no exhaustive cata¬
logue of duties: they direct us to the inexhaustible
spring of dutiful conduct which rises up within the
filial subject of the Kingdom {cf. John iv. 14 ; 2 Cor.
iii. 6 b.).
These vital distinctions are involved in the contrast
between the righteousness of the Kingdom and
the righteousness of the Scribes and Pharisees
(Matt. v. 20).
They bred a legal, Jesus a loyal spirit.
They taught men to seek life in law (John v. 39/);
He taught men to find law in life ( see § 44).
a. This Law forbids
Murder (Mark x. 19; Luke xviii. 20; Matt. xix.
18) ; but also anger (Matt. v. 22), contempt
(Matt. v. 22 ; xviii. 10; Mark vii. 22), harshness
THE LAW OF THE BROTHERHOOD . 27
of speech or judgment (Matt. v. 22 ; vii. 1 ;
Mark vii. 22);
Adultery (Mark x. 19, &c.) ; but also lustful intent
(Matt. v. 28 ; Mark vii. 22) ;
Theft (Mark x. 19, &c.; vii. 21, &c.); but also covet¬
ousness (Mark vii. 22 ; Luke xii. 15) ;
Perjury or false witness (Mark x. 19, &c.); but also
swearing of any kind (Matt, v, 34 ff.) and
deceit (Mark vii. 22) ; and in general
Causing anyone to stumble (Mark ix. 42; Luke
xvii. 2 ; Matt, xviii. 6).
“ Thou shalt not cause anyone to stumble ” is as much a
Christian Commandment as any found in the Deca¬
logue. Observe its comprehensiveness.
b. This Law enjoins
Purity of heart (Matt. v. 8);
Sincerity ; accord of outer and inner life; no
“ acting ” (hypocrisis, Matt. vi.—vii.; xxiii.,
&c.);
Veracity of speech (Matt. v. 37).
[Out of this Law of Sincerity—this fragment of Jesus’
ethics—Carlyle has made a great part of his gospel.]
Forgiveness (Mark xi. 25) till seventy times seven
(Matt, xviii. 22) from the heart (Matt, xviii.
35); on pain of awful doom (Matt. vi. 15;
xviii. 35) ;
Patience (Luke viii. 15 ; xxi. 19) ;
Meekness (Matt. v. 5), conciliatoriness (Luke xii.
58 ; Matt. v. 25), peaceableness (Mark ix. 50),
yielding (Luke vi. 29^; Matt. v. 39^); peace¬
making (Matt. v. 9) ;
Charitableness (Luke vi. 37, 41 /; Matt. vii. 1-5);
28
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
Courtesy (Matt. v. 22, 47); obligingness (Matt,
v. 42);
broad sympathies (Mark ix. 39, 40 ; Luke ix. 50);
love to enemies (Luke vi. 27 ; Matt. v. 44);
Humility (Mark ix. 33 ff.\ Matt, xviii. 4; Luke
xiv. 11);
Unobtrusiveness (Matt, vi.); modest self-deprecia¬
tion (Luke xvii. 10) ;
[“ The Gospel of Silence.”]
Service : to minister and not to be ministered unto
is to be great; servant of all is first of all (Mark
x. 43 ff.\ Matt. xx. 26 ff.\ Luke xxii. 26 f);
[“The Gospel of Work ” is a modern form of this
Law of Service, which is also the Law of Mastery
and the pathway of ambition. Show how it bears on
the idler and the swaggerer. ]
Generosity unstinted and undespairing (Luke vi.
30-35 ; Matt. v. 42; Luke xiv. 14), and
especially
Kindness (mercy, Hosea’s Hesedh , § 10); Matt. v.
7 ; Luke vi. 36) to
all in want or distress (Luke x. 37);
the poor (Luke xii. 33 ; Mark x. 21 ; Luke
xviii. 22 ; Matt. xix. 21) ;
the hungry, thirsty, strangers, naked, prisoners
(Matt. xxv. 35 #) 1
the sick (Matt. x. 8 ; cf. Mark vi. 13 ; Luke ix.
6 ; Matt. xxv. 36) ;
the maimed, lame, blind (Luke xiv. J2 ff) ;
children and the like (Mark ix. 37 ; Luke ix.
48 ; Matt, xviii. 5-10).
[Philanthropy, social reform, “the Gospel of
UNITY OF THE LA W OF THE KINGDOM. 29
Wealth,” are a few phases of this Law of Kindness.
The stingy man is immoral.]
C. This law not merely rules the conduct of
brother to brother, but also the conduct of
those within to those without the Kingdom, to
enemies, persecutors and aliens (Luke vi.
27-36 ; Matt. v. 38-48).
Request : Lord, have mercy upon us, and incline
our hearts to keep this Law.
44. The Unity of the Law of the Kingdom.
The whole law hangs from one principle ( cf. the
Pith of the Law, § 27), which is
(1) in terms of action—
“Do to others as ye would that others do to
you” (Luke vi. 31 ; Matt. vii. 12).
(2) In terms of motive, and thus nearer the root—
“Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself”
(Mark xii. 31 ; Luke x. 28 ; Matt. xxii. 39/),
even though he be as unpleasing to thee as
Samaritan to Jew (Luke x. 29-37).
(3) as ground or root in nature—
“Ye shall be perfect as your Father is perfect”
(Matt. v. 48 ; Luke vi. 36).
So morality passes into religion.
But, according to § 41, religion passes into morality.
Strictly speaking, however, in the Kingdom of God
morality is only one phase of religion. To be son of
God is to be brother to every man.
Request : For hourly touch with Him in whom
Law and Life are Love.
30
THE KINGDOM OP GOD
Wfc have collated the sayings concerning (a) The God
whose is the Kingdom, and (fr) The Subjects of the
Kingdom. We now study the sayings touching the cen¬
tral figure of
G—'The Christ.
§ 45. His Titles.
Jesus calls Himself all but invariably The Son of
Man (fourteen times in Mark ; twenty-five in
Luke; thirty in Matthew);
never (directly) Son of God, though implying it
(Mark xii. 6 ; Luke xx. 13 ; Matt. xxi. 37);
on two occasions “The Son 55 as related to the
Father (Luke x. 22 ; Matt. xi. 27 ; Mark xiii.
32 );
rarely, if at all, the Christ (Mark ix. 41 ; Luke xxiv.
26, 46 ; Matt, xxiii. 10 ; xxiv. 5) ;
twice the King (Matt. xxv. 34, 40);
questions the title of the Son of David (Mark xii
35 ^* ; Luke xx. 41^; Matt. xxii. 41 ff.).
He accepts the confession of Peter (chief of the
Apostles):—
“Thou art The Christ” (Mark viii. 29); of God
(Luke ix. 20); the Son of the Living God (Matt,
xvi. 16) ;
in answer to the adjuration of the High Priest (the
religious chief of Israel), declares that He is
the Christ the Son of God (Mark xiv. 62 ;
Matt. xxvi. 64 ; Luke xxii. 66-70) ;
and in answer to Pilate, Procurator of Imperial
Rome, avows Himself King of the Jews (Mark
xv. 2.; Luke xxiii. 3 ; Matt, xxvii. 11).
“ THE SON OF MAN."
3i
Request : “ Who art Thou, Lord ? ” (Acts ix. 5).
“Tell me, I pray Thee, Thy Name” (Gen.
xxxii. 29).
(Even in the most sacred quest the rule holds:—
Always obtain information from the highest author¬
ities. Get your facts first-hand.)
§ 46. “The Son of Man.”
This being the title almost always used by Jesus
when speaking of Himself, if we find out its
meaning we get at His thought of Himself.
“ The Kingdom of God ” and “ The Son of Man ”
are Two Great Ideas of Jesus, which, under¬
stood in themselves and in their reciprocal
relations, give us the essence of His Gospel.
a —In Hebrew and Aramaic “son” denoted also
member of species or class. “ Sons of man ”
(in our version “ sons of men”) are members of
the human race, human beings. The singular
“ A son of man ” is thus simply “ a human being,”
“ a man.”
“ The Son of Man ” is “ the human being par
excelle 7 ice , “the typical characteristic Man,”
“the Man of men,” “The Man.”
So far mere grammar guides us. But the
phrase has a history.
b —The seer in Daniel vii. 13 beheld as the recipient
of the everlasting Kingdom (the faithful Jews
under the figure of) one like a son of man
(§ 26): Humanity regnant.
32
THE KINGDOM OF GOD,
The seer in Enoch expected as personal in-bringer
of the Kingdom of God a Son of Man (§ 28) :
a regnant Man.
c —The vision in Daniel was certainly present to
Jesus’ mind (often and especially in Mark xiv.
62). He knew that He was bringing in the
Kingdom of Humanity portrayed in Daniel.
He was a Son of Man sent for that purpose.
He was more. He embodied the reign of
Humanity which he inaugurated. He was the
Son of Man.
At the outset, therefore, we may say that
“ The Son of Man ” on Jesus’ lips means the typical,
representative, or ideal Man—the personal
pattern, model, or Standard of Humanity,—
who receives from God, embodies, establishes,
and governs the Kingdom of Humanity spoken
of in Daniel which is destined to supersede all
lower and brutal forms of rule. Or in fewer
words
The Son of Man is The Ideal Man, empowered
of God to bring in and rule over the King¬
dom of Humanity, which is the Kingdom
of God:
the personal ideal Divinely equipped to realise
the social ideal of Humanity.
This is but a preliminary definition supplied by the phrase
itself and its Apocalyptic usage. Yet even so the
title indicates a character at once universal (Son of
Man) and unique (The Son of Man); related to all
men, and regulative of all men ; of man, yet above
“ THE SON OF MAN"
33
man ; the soul of perfect sympathy and of absolute
authority.
What meaning we are to find in “ Man ” and
“Humanity” we must learn not chiefly from
verbal or prophetic sources, but from Jesus
Himself. His life fills in the contents of the
idea given above.
Even His usage of the phrase shows how far His
thought rose beyond the thought of men before
Him or of His time.
The seers in Daniel and Enoch employed the
phrase in connection with events which the
Synoptics associate with the later Advent.
Jesus used it much more frequently in other
connections. Out of thirty-six occasions on
which the phrase is reported in the Synoptics
as uttered by Jesus, only sixteen refer to the
later Advent. In sayings attested by more
than one Synoptic the proportion is still smaller.
Thus with Jesus “the Son of Man” is only in
a minor degree an eschatological idea. Even
where He used it of the Later Advent, as in
Matt. xxv. 31 ff., He gave it a present-day and
perennial import. Whatsoever is done to one
of the least of His brethren is done unto “ the
Son of Man ” (ver. 31), as though to say He is
' now and always the central sensorium of
mankind.
From the twenty occasions on. which Jesus used the phrase
apart from reference to His second coming, we learn
that the Son of Man was in His thought one who
came to seek and save the lost, came to minister and
give His life a ransom for many, came eating and
c
2
34
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
drinking [not like the ascetic Baptist], had not where
to lay His head, sowed the good seed, was like Jonah
a sign, had authority on earth to forgive sins (words
spoken against Him would be forgiven), was Lord of
the Sabbath, went as was written of Him ; must
needs fulfil the Scriptures, suffer, die, rise again, and
was betrayed with a kiss : blessed are those perse¬
cuted for His sake.
Request : Luke xxi. 34-36.
§ 47. The Anointed Ruler.
According to Jesus’ own usage, “ The Son of Man ”
stands foremost among His titles.
He also accepted from others the title of “The
Christ,” though rarely using it Himself.
“ Christ ” is commonly used as a personal name ;
it is really an official title. It is the English
form of the Greek Christos , which translates
the Hebrew Mashiach —Anointed (Messiah).
Mashiach occurs thirty-nine times in the Old Testa¬
ment. It is used
Once of an oiled shield (2 Sam. i. 21);
eleven times of Saul (1 Sam. xii. 5 j &c.) J
[Saul was literally the Lord’s Christ.]
twice certainly of David (2 Sam. xix. 21 ; xxiii. 1);
five times vaguely of David and his seed (2 Sam. xxii.
57, &c.);
twice perhaps of Solomon (2 Chron. vi. 42 ; Ps. cxxxii. 10 );
once probably of Zedekiah (Lam. iv. 20) ;
eight times of a king undefined (e.g, Ps. ii. 2) ;
once of Cyrus (Isa. xlv. 1) ;
JCyrus was literally “ the Lord’s Christ.”J
THE ANOINTED RULER .
35
four times certainly of a High Priest (Lev. iv. 3, 5, 16;
vi. 22) ;
twice probably of a High Priest (Dan. ix. 2% 26);
twice (the same passage repeated) indirectly of Prophets
of Jehovah (Psalm cv. 15; 1 C’nron. xvi. 22; cf. 1
Kings xix. 16). Thus
“ Christ” denotes in the older Scriptures
twice prophet,
six times priest,
thirty times king.
To speak arithmetically we should think of The
Christ as fifteen times more King than Prophet, and
five times more King than Priest.
The other Jewish writings outside the Canon con¬
firm the emphasis on “ King” in Christ. His¬
torically, therefore,
“ The Christ ” is pre-eminently “ The Anointed
King in the (actual or expected Israelitish)
Kingdom of God.”
People generally treat “Jesus ” and “ Christ ” as synony¬
mous words, quite forgetting that the statement
“Jesus is the Christ” was held to prove a distinct
revelation from God (Matt. xvi. 17), and formed the
theme of the Apostolic Gospel (Acts xvii. 3).
Cf. Gautama is the Buddha (The Enlightened One).
Request : For the Anointing from God (1 John ii.
20, 27 ; 2 Cor. i. 21).
36
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
§ 48. His general relation to the Kingdom.
By the titles which He assumes or accepts (§§ 5,
12, 24, 26, 28, 46, 47) as well as by His refer¬
ences to the fulfilment of Scripture (§ 33),
Jesus shows that He knows Himself to be
The Coming One (Luke vii. 18^; Matt. xi. 2
the Agent of God to bring in the Kingdom, and
the Vicegerent of God to rule in it.
God appointed Him a Kingdom (Lukexxii. 29), and
has delivered all things unto Him (Luke x. 22 ;
Matt. xi. 27).
He was sent to proclaim the Kingdom of God (Luke
iv. 43 >
When Lie first proclaims it, it is at hand (Mark i. 15,
& c.).
He plants the germ of the Kingdom (Matt. xiii. 24,
37). Then
When He by the power of God casts out demons,
the Kingdom is already “come upon you”
(Luke xi. 20 ; Matt. xii. 28), “ The Kingdom of
God is in the midst of you” (Luke xvii. 21).
The Greek word here means within or among. As it
could scarcely be said that the Kingdom of God was
within the tempting Pharisees, we must translate ‘ ‘ in
the midst of you.”
The New Covenant (/.., the relation between God
and the subjects of the Kingdom) is in His
blood (Mark xiv. 24; Luke xxii. 20; Matt,
xxvi. 28).
From the time of His trial He sits on the right hand
of the power of God (Luke xxii. 69 ; Matt. xxvi.
64).
HIS RELATION TO THE FATHER.
37
To Him is given all authority in heaven and on
earth (Matt, xxviii. 18).
In His name all nations are to be baptized (Matt,
xxviii. 19).
He comes again at the consummation of the age,
on the clouds of heaven, in the glory of the
Father, with angels (Mark viii. 38 ; Luke ix.
26 ; Matt. xvi. 27 ; Mark xiii. 26 ; Luke xxi.
27; Matt. xxiv. 30; xxv. 31; Mark xiv. 62;
xxii. 69 ; Matt. xxvi. 64);
as King and Judge to cast out the wicked from
the Kingdom (Matt. vii. 23 ; xiii. 40 ff.\ xxv. 41),
and to gather into it the righteous (Mark xiii.
27, &c.; Matt. xxv. 34).
Hence it is u His Kingdom” (Matt. xiii. 4 1 > xvi. 28 ;
Luke xxii. 30).
Attitude to Him is in the Divine judgment abso¬
lutely decisive (Luke xii. 8 f ; Matt. x. 3 2 f 5
xxv. 40, 45, 46).
And He must now be followed (Mark viii. 34 \ Luke
ix. 23 ; Matt. xvi.'24 ; x. 38).
Request : For help to hallow Christ in our hearts
as Lord (1 Peter iii. 15).
§ 49. His relation to the Father.
He is the Son of God, “ the Son” absolutely (§ 45 )-
He is sent (of the Father, Luke x. 16 ; Matt,
x. 40).
To Him the Father delivered all things ; only
He and His know the Father ; only the Father
knows Him (Luke x. 22 ; Matt. xi. 27).
The cures He wrought were performed by God
38
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
(Luke xi. 20 ; Matt. xii. 28 ; Mark v. 19 ; Luke
viii. 39).
To despise Him is to despise His Sender (Luke
x. 16); to receive Him is to receive His Sender
(Matt. x. 40).
He sends the promise of the Father on His
disciples (Luke xxiv. 49).
Why call Him good ? since God alone is good (Mark
x. 18; Luke xviii. 19).
Not He, but the Father only knoweth of “ that
hour ” (Mark xiii. 32).
Not His will but the Father’s must be done
(Mark xiv. 36 ; Luke xxii. 42 ; Matt. xxvi. 39).
It is not His but the Father’s to give seats of
honour next to Him (Mark x. 40 ; Matt. xx. 23).
He prays to the Father (fiassim) ; for Simon’s faith
(Luke xxii. 32) ; for His murderers’ forgiveness
(Luke xxiii. 34).
Before death He asks His God why He has
forsaken Him (Mark xv. 34 ; Matt, xxvii. 46).
At death He commends His spirit into the
Father’s hands (Luke xxiii. 46).
He has been appointed a Kingdom by His Father
(Luke xxii. 29).
All authority in heaven and earth has been
given Him (by the Father) (Matt, xxviii. 18).
He will come in the glory of Llis Father (Mark
viii. 38; Luke ix. 26 ; Matt. xvi. 27), to confess
or deny before His Father those who confess
or deny Him before men (Matt. x. 32 /. • cf.
Luke xii. 8 /.).
Request : Show us the Father (John xiv. 8, 21, 23).
HIS RELATIONS TO THE SUBJECTS . 39
§ 50. His relations to the Subjects.
He sowed the seed whence they sprang (Matt. xiii.
37 )-
He came to minister (unto them, Mark x. 45 ;
Matt. xx. 28 ; cf. Luke xxii. 27); to seek and
save (them when) lost (Luke xix. 10) ;
to make them whole from their sin (Mark ii.
17 ; Luke v. 32 ; Matt. ix. 12/).
He gives His life as a ransom for them (Mark x.
45 ; Matt. xx. 28).
His body is given for them (Luke xxii. 19).
His blood of the (New) Covenant is shed for them
(Mark xiv. 24; Luke xxii. 20) unto remission
of sins (Matt. xxvi. 28).
He has authority on earth to forgive (their) sins
(Mark ii. 10; Luke v. 24; Matt. ix. 6; Luke
vii. 48).
He gives rest to their souls (Matt. xi. 28, 29).
He is their Teacher (Matt. xxvi. 18) and prophet
(Mark vi. 4 ; Luke iv. 24 ; Matt. xiii. 57 ; Luke
xiii. 33); they believe on Him (Matt, xviii. 6);
they are His disciples (Matt, xxviii. 19); they
learn of Him (Matt. xi. 29).
He is their Example (Mark x. 43-45, &c.).
He is their Lord (Matt. xxv. 37); they obey Him.
(Luke vi. 46 ff.\ Matt. vii. 21^.'); take His
yoke upon them (Matt. xi. 29).
He is their Leader (Matt, xxiii. 10) and Shepherd
(Mark xiv. 27; Matt. xxvi. 31); they follow
Him at all risks and costs (bearing the cross)
(Mark viii. 34; Luke ix. 23 ; Matt. xvi. 24 ;
Mark x. pi ; Luke xviii. 22; Matt. xix. 21 ; x. 38).
40
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
For His sake they suffer, or must be ready to suffer,
persecution, the hatred of all men (Mark xiii.
9 ^; Luke xxi. 12 ff.\ Matt. xxiv. 9), loss of
home and kindred, and friends, and wealth,
and life (Mark x. 28 ff. ; Luke xviii. 28 ff. ;
Matt. xix. 27 ff; Luke xiv. 25-33; Matt. x.
37 - 39 )-
They are His elect (Matt. xxiv. 31).
He calls them His friends (Luke xii. 4; cf. John xv.
14 , 15 )-
They are His brethren (Mark iii. 35; Luke viii. 21 ;
Matt. xii. 50; xxv. 40-45).
Aught done to them is done to Him (Mark ix. 37 ;
Luke ix. 48; Matt, xviii. 5 ; Luke x. 16; Matt,
x. 40 ; xxv. 40-45).
They confess Him before men (Luke xii. 8; Matt,
x. 32).
They take the Supper in remembrance of Him
(Luke xxii. 19).
They are to make all the nations His disciples,
baptizing them in His name,
teaching them His commandments (Matt,
xxviii. 19-20).
Where two or three meet in His name there is He
(Matt, xviii. 20).
He is with them always until the consummation of
the age (Matt, xxviii. 20).
They watch for His appearing (Mark xiii. 33-35 ;
Luke xii. 40; xxi. 36; Matt. xxiv. 42).
He confesses them before the angels of God (Luke
xii. 8), before His Father (Matt. x. 32).
He welcomes them to the Kingdom prepared for
them (Matt. xxv. 34), for
THE DEATH OF THE CHRIST.
4i
He appoints them a Kingdom, that they may eat
and drink at His table in His Kingdom (Luke
xxii. 29 f ).
REQUEST : That we be kept in the simplicity and
purity that is towards Christ (2 Cor. xi. 3).
§ 51. The Death of the Christ.
There are three chief stages in the teaching of Jesus
concerning His Death. They begin respec¬
tively—
a. When Peter first proclaimed Him the Christ.
From that moment Jesus declares that the Son
of Man must needs suffer rejection and death,
and will rise again (Mark viii. 31; Luke ix. 22;
Matt. xvi. 21 ; Mark ix. 31, &c.).
He had uttered no whisper before of a violent end
(not even in Mark ii. 20). Thus the Death appears
to be connected with the calling of the Christ. Be¬
cause the Son of Man must needs suffer death, we
know it is necessary to the bringing in of the King¬
dom.
He finds His Death foretold in Scripture (Mark ix.
12).
On this prediction of His Passion and Resurrection
He announces new conditions of fellowship.
The would-be disciple must deny self, take up his
cross and follow the Christ. For, by following
Him who is to die and rise again, a man in
losing his life shall save it (Mark viii. 34; Luke
ix. 23; Matt. xvi. 24).
42
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Jesus next declares outright that the Death is a pur-
pose of His coming.
b. On the Request of the Sons of Zebedee.
Jesus says they shall drink of His cup, and be
baptized with His baptism (i.e., share in His
sufferings, cf Mark xiv. 36). He tells them
that in His fellowship men master by serving,
“rule by obeying,” rise highest by stooping
lowest ; for— in full accord with this law —The
Son of Man also— the Regnant Man, the Christ
caine not to be served but to serve , and , bend¬
ing to the last sacrifice involved in service, to
give His life a ransom for (instead of) many
(Mark x. 35-45 ; Matt. xx. 20-28).
Thus the Death is an act of service to many (presum¬
ably the subjects of the Kingdom). His life given
instead of many is a means of deliverance (presum¬
ably from that to which the life is given, viz., from
Death). He dies that they may live.
c. At the Last Supper.
The following table will show at a glance the four
(Synoptic and Pauline) accounts of the in¬
augural sentences, and the degree of attestation
belonging to each word. ( See Mark xiv. 22-24;
Matt. xxvi. 26-28 ; Luke xxii. 19, 20; 1 Cor. xi!
24 , 25).
P 3
CD
Cx*
z
14
>
O
oO
PP
C_D
s
pp
CZD
m
OO
i-1
OO
i-1
E — 1
H
<
fa
" pp
-=d
E-*
I-q
PQ
OO
i—-1
o
PP
CJ>
-=cj
P 3
CQ
PP
PP
Ph
oO
PP
E-h
q_
CD
CD
OO
I <
I- 1 -1
E — 1
oi
o
fa
h
fa
o
j
j
<
w
>*
*
z
>—I
Q
WHWj
«C<
22fafa
j
ss.j2
SSB§
SEfafa
C^-(
a
Pcq
^T—j
C/2
oQ
E—'
kC|
P =3
t=-
C=D
P=P
i—i—i
i— 1 —i
E — 1
MHWj
5$b&3
HH
o
Pi
o
fa
o
H
z
P
WHWj
faHfap
SSfafa
44
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
The words over the Tread add little to what lie has
said before. But very much fresh light falls from the
words over the Wine. They are bright with the
memory of great deeds and hopes in Israel’s past.
(1) The words, “Blood” and “Covenant,” found
togetner in all four sources, recall the words of
Moses when the Covenant was made at Sinai,
according to Ex. xxiv. 4-8. The people said,
“ All that Jehovah has spoken will we do, and be
obedient.” And Moses, having sprinkled first
the altar then the people with the blood (of
“ burnt-offerings ” and “ peace-offerings,” not of
“ sin-offerings ” or “ guilt-offerings ”), said,
“ Behold, the blood of the Covenant which
Jehovah has made with you.”
It is almost certain that Jesus was thinking of that
scene at Sinai. As then Jehovah entered into cove¬
nant with the old Israelitish community, so now the
Father entered into covenant with the members of
the Evangelic Kingdom. “ My blood of the Cove¬
nant corresponded to the blood of the burnt-offering
(symbol of homage, devotion, worship), and of the
peace-offering (symbol of fellowship, friendship, com¬
munion).
(2) Zechariah (ix. after bidding Jerusalem
rejoice because her King was coming to her,
“ lowly riding upon an ass,” added in the name
of Jehovah, “Because of the blood of thy Cove¬
nant I have sent forth thy prisoners out of the
pit wherein is no water.”
Jesus had deliberately fulfilled the first part of this
oracle by His triumphal entry into Jerusalem a few
THE DEATH OF THE CHRIST.
45
days before. Was He now thinking of the second
part? By “the blood of thy Covenant” Zechariah
possibly meant the homage and communion sacri-
ficially expressed, by which, from the time of Moses
downwards, the Covenant with Israel had been rati¬
fied. Thus (2) refers us back to (1), with the added
meaning that the blood of the Covenant was a reason
for God’s delivering prisoners from a miserable
dungeon.
(3) Jeremiah (xxxi. 31-34) foretells a New Covenant
with Israel: Jehovah will write His Law in
their heart: they shall each and all know Him :
for He will forgive their iniquity.
Paul and Luke report “New Covenant,” and
Matthew reports “unto forgiveness of sins” :
* so three out of our four sources seem to refer to
Jeremiah’s hope : which was certainly the origin
of our phrase, New Covenant (New Testament);
(cf. 2 Cor. iii. 3-6 ; Heb. viii. 8-13 ; ix. 15).
If this prophetic word were present to the mind of
Jesus, it would add the ideas of the inward law, of
personal intimacy with God, and of the forgiveness of
sins to the Covenant constitutive (1) and liberative (2).
(4) The words follow the Passover meal, and Jesus
has just spoken (Luke xxii. 16) of the Passover
being fulfilled in the Kingdom of God.
It is probable that Jesus connected in His own mind
the deliverance of Israel from Egyptian bondage with
the deliverance of His followers from some adverse
power.
There is nothing to show that Jesus thought of Him¬
self as the paschal Lamb (Ex. xii. 3-S). He used
46
THE KINGDOM. OF GOD.
bread and not the lamb’s flesh as the emblem of His
body.
The paschal lamb was not a “sin-offering”: its
blood was a protective token (Ex. xii. 13).
The moment was one of swift, wide-ranging thought
and intense emotion. Many reminiscences and
images must have come thronging to His mind, to be
blended into the indissoluble unity of the two historic
sentences.
The analogy of the Exodus and of the Sinaitic Cove¬
nant was probably uppermost, but with it may have
been mingled elements from the whole sacrificial
system and prophetic hope of Israel.
We may perhaps interpret the words thus :
The beginnings of the New Kingdom are likened to
the beginnings of the Old “ Kingdom of priests.”
(Ex. xix. 6).
God is delivering the subjects of His Kingdom from
miserable bondage to a hostile power typified by
Egypt.
He is forming with them a Covenant, or ratifying
the relation in which He and they stand to each other,
so making and marking them a distinct community.
To the ratifying of this Covenant, the Death of Jesus,
the Christ of the Kingdom, is necessary.
Jesus offers Himself as a sacrifice to God (Ex.
xxiv. 4 f). In this sacrifice the subjects of the King¬
dom, in some modified sense, participate (being
sprinkled then, drinking the cup now).
The- Covenant so ratified secures the forgiveness of
sins. Instead of the Law-in-the-Book (Ex. xxiv.
7), it puts the Law-in-the Heart. In other words,
The death of the Christ is necessary to the ratifying
of the relation in which the Father stands to
the subjects of His Kingdom. It is a sacrifice
SUMMARY OF DIVISION C.
47
which is made by the Christ to the Father, and
in which the subjects in some measure partici¬
pate. The relation it ratifies carries with it
forgiveness of sins from God and inward obedi-
ence from man. It marks the deliverance of
the subjects from a power hostile to the King¬
dom, and the establishment of the Kingdom as
a distinct and independent community.
Thank's be to God for His unspeakable Gift (2 Cor.
ix. 15).
§ 52. Summary of Division C.
In relation to the Father, Jesus is the Ideal
Subject (§ 49).
In relation to His followers, He is the Ideal
King (§ 50).
Hence in His own person, He realizes the Ideal
of the Kingdom:
He is in personal form what the Kingdom
of God is in social.
Hence the quest after the Kingdom (Luke xii. 31;
Matt. vi. 33), and all the great moral and
religious laws of the Kingdom (§§ 41-44)
are summed up in the command “ Follow
Me ” (Mark viii. 34, &c.).
48
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
D.—When and How the Kingdom Comes.
(The Time and Manner of its Appearing.)
§ 53. The Present Kingdom.
The Kingdom of God is spoken of as present.
It is at hand (Mark 1. 15; Matt. iv. 17 ; x. 7 ;
Luke x. 9).
It is “come upon you” (Luke xi. 20; Matt. xii.
28).
It is “in the midst of you ” (Luke xvii. 21).
It is being entered by men “from the days of
John the Baptist” (Luke xvi. 16; Matt. xi.
12, 13).
§ 54. The Future Kingdom.
The Kingdom of God is spoken of as still in the
future.
It shall have come with power before the death
of bystanders (Mark ix. 1 ; Luke ix. 27 ; Matt,
xvi. 28 ; cf. Mark xiii. 30 ; Luke xxi. 32 ; Matt,
xxiv. 34).
Until it shall come, Jesus will drink no more of
the fruit of the vine (Luke xxii. 18).
Those who expect it immediately to appear are
reminded that the Lord must go hence to
obtain the Kingdom and return (Luke xix.
”#)•
The long tribulation, the signs in heaven, the com¬
ing of the Son of Man in clouds with glory and
power (Mark xiii.; Luke xxi. ; Matt. xxiv.;
THE LAW OF GROWTH.
49
cf. Luke xvii. 24^.), indicate that the Kingdom
of God (in Matt, “consummation of the age”)
is nigh (Luke xxi. 31).
The twelve shall not have gone through the
cities of Israel till the Son of Man be come
(Matt. x. 23).
This Gospel of the Kingdom shall first be
preached in the whole world unto all the
nations (Mark xiii. 10 ; Matt. xxiv. 14).
Though, for the accomplishment of these things, no
more than the duration of “ this generation ” is
allowed, yet 'of that day knoweth no one, not
even the Son, but the Father (Mark xiii. 30, 32 ;
Luke xxi. 32 ; Matt. xxiv. 34, 36).
§ 55. The Law of Growth (or Evolution ).
The present and the future Kingdom are one and
the same {cf §§ 24 and 26), the Kingdom of
God being a thing of growth or development
•' (evolution is the modern word), like the
seed-corn (Mark iv. 26 ff.\ Matt. xiii.
mustard-seed (Mark iv. 30^; Luke xiii. 18
f; Matt. xiii. 31 f),
leaven in meal (Luke xiii. 20 f; Matt. xiii.
33) \ and having like them a
commencement (§ 53), and a
consummation (§ 54).
Request : “ Thy Kingdom Come.”
2
D
5°
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
§ 56. The Process of Growth.
The growth of the Kingdom is “ not with observa¬
tion” (Luke xvii. 20), is
gradual, passing through various stages (Mark
iv. 26 f .);
spontaneous or natural (“ of herself,” automate ,
Mark iv. 28) ;
mysterious (he knoweth not how, Mark iv. 27);
pervasive and assimilative, like leaven (Luke xiii.
20 f; Matt. xiii. 33) or salt (Matt. v. 13).
§ 57 . The Means of Growth.
The Kingdom advances by the good heart of its
subjects bringing forth good fruit (Luke vi. 45 ;
Matt. xii. 35) in
good works (Matt. v. 16), i.e., a life in accord with
the Law of the Brotherhood (§ 50); more
especially by
healing (Luke x. 9 ; Matt. x. 8 ", cf. Mark iii. 15 ;
vi. 7-13 ; Luke ix. 1, 2, 6),
preaching (Mark vi. 7, 12 ; Luke ix. 2 ; x. 9 ;
Matt. x. 7) : this gospel of the Kingdom shall
be preached unto all the nations (Mark xiii. 10 ;
Matt. xxiv. 14), and disciples made of them
(Matt, xxviii. 19 ; cf. Luke xxiv. 47);
prayer (Matt, xviii. 19; so Luke xviii. 7 and
§ 41 c.) ; “Pray...Thy Kingdom come” (Luke
xi. 2 ; Matt. vi. 10);
“power from on high” (Luke xxiv. 49), “ a mouth
and wisdom” given by the Christ (Luke xxi.
HERE AS YONDER.
5i
13-15); and the presence of the Christ with
His people (Matt, xviii. 20; xxviii. 20); for
God gives the Kingdom (Luke xii. 32).
Request : For childlike hearts that we may rightly
receive.
E.— Where the Kingdom Comes.
The Sphere of its Realization *
\
§ 58. Here as Yonder.
The Kingdom is already realized in Heaven (“as
in Heaven” Matt. vi. 10; xxv. 34; whence
perhaps the phrase “ Kingdom of Heaven,” cf.
§ 30 -
With Jesus it appeared on earth (§§ 48 and 50).
On earth it is to be realized (“ as in Heaven so on
earth,” Matt. vi. 10); diffusing itself as salt of
the earth (Matt. v. 13); as light of the world
(Matt. v. 14). “The meek shall inherit the
earth” (Matt. v. 5).
It comes therefore into relation with the existing world
of Nature and of Man. Note that the word “Nature”
expresses a modern abstraction foreign to Jesus’ thought,
and is used here only as a convenient term for the world
known to the senses and distinct from Man.
Request : To be saved from “ other-worldliness.”
* For “the Social Articulation of the Kingdom,” see my essay in
“ Faith and Criticism” (Sampson, Low & Co., 1893), pp. 305-320.
52
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
§ 59. In Nature.
Nature is the creation of God'(Mark xiii. 19), is a
continual expression of His beneficent Will
(Matt. v. 45; Luke xii. 28; Matt. vi. 30, &c.;
see §§35 an d 54 ): but
is in its several parts of much less value than
“you” (Luke xii. 7; Matt. x. 31; Luke xii.
24 ; Matt. vi. 26; Luke xii. 28 ; Matt. vi. 30);
and
even in its least pleasing phases (Luke x. 19),
is subordinant and subservient to the Kingdom
as operative in the faith, of its subjects (Mark
ix. 23; xi. 23; Luke xvii. 6; Matt. xvii. 20;
xxi. 21), or in the command of the Christ
(Mark iv. 39; Luke viii. 24 ; Matt. viii. 26 ;
Mark xi. 14; Matt. xxi. 19). So Mark xiii.
Luke xxi. 25^; Matt. xxiv. 29.
This and § 35 supply the Christian basis of
modern natural science.
Request : Luke xvii. 5.
§ 60. In Man : his body.
Man is composed of body and soul which are
separable (Matt. x. 28).
The healing of diseases mostly goes along with the
preaching of the Kingdom (e.g., Luke x. 9 ;
Matt. x. 8 ; cf. Mark iii. 15 ; vi. 7-13 ; Luke ix.
1, 2, 6).
The healing of demoniacs is a proof of the King¬
dom’s presence (Luke xi. 20 ; Matt. xii. 28).
MAN’S WORLDLY GOODS.
53
Healing power goes forth from the Christ (Luke
viii. 46 ; cf. Mark v. 30 ; Luke vi. 19).
Healing deeds are credentials of The Coming
One (Luke vii. 22 ; Matt. xi. 5).
Faith is the condition of this healing (Mark vi. 5-6;
ix. 23 ; v. 34 ; and often).
The Kingdom of God operates to make man
whole, free from every physical defect.
The Christian Doctrine of Health.
Request : 3 John 2.
§ 61. His Worldly Goods.
A man’s life consistetli not in the abundance of his
possessions (Luke xii. 15)-
Riches are the mammon of unrighteousness (Luke
xvi. 9, 11), and^re often a hindrance to enter¬
ing the Kingdom (Mark x. 23 5 Luke xviii. 24 j
Matt. xix. 23),
yet may be so used as to secure a friendly wel¬
come into eternal tabernacles (Luke xvi. 9).
That the hungry shall be filled is a blessing of the
Kingdom (Luke vi. 21),
and a command of the Christ (Mark vi. 37 ; Luke
‘ ix. 13 ; Matt. xiv. 16 ; cf. Mark viii. 'iff .; Matt.
xv. 32 ff).
The poor are blessed ; for theirs is the Kingdom
(Luke vi. 20).
Giving to the poor must be practised on a large
scale (e.g., Luke xii. 33; xiv. 13; Mark x. 21 ;
Luke xviii. 22 ; Matt. xix. 21).
54
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
The Kingdom must be sought first, rather than
food, raiment, and the like (Luke xii. 29-31 ;
Matt. vi. 31-33)-
Nevertheless, “all these things shall be added unto
you ” {ibid).
And there must be no anxiety, but a cheerful faith
concerning these things (Luke xii. 22, 30).
The Kingdom operates by kindness (humanity)
and faith (anticipative insight), to remove
the pain of poverty.
The Christian Theory of Wealth, or Christian
Economics.
Request : For deliverance from the service of
Mammon.
g 62. The Home.
The family being (§§ 10, 37, 38, 42) the model in
miniature of the Kingdom of God, Jesus laid
heavy stress on the laws which make and mark
it.
Married life is a (monogamous) unity created by
God, and therefore not to be dissolved by man
(Mark x. 6 ff. ; Matt. xix. 4 ff. ; Luke xvi. 18 ;
Matt. v. 32).
That one man and one woman are made by God
into one personality is the sorely-needed, much-
forgotten Christian idea of marriage.
Children must honour father and mother (Mark vii.
10 ff. ; Matt. xv. /[ff.; Mark x. 19, &c.).
Of such (children) is the Kingdom of God (Mark x.
14; Luke xviii. 16, Matt. xix. 14).
THE STATE. $5
Yet the claims of home-life so divinely enfoiced
must bend to (and if need arise be refused for)
the claims of the Kingdom of God (Mark iii.
31^; Luke viii. 19 ff- \ Matt. xii. dfsf. ; xix. 12 ;
Luke xiv. 26 ; Matt. x. 37 \ Luke xii. 5 2 /-> Matt.
x. 35/)•
Request : That our own fireside may be God’s
hearth.
§ 63. The State.
Existing forms of government are to be complied
with, whether local (Jewish : Matt. xvii. 24^)
or imperial (Roman : Mark xii. 17 > Luke xx.
25; Matt. xxii. 21),
save where they clash with the supeiior claims
of the Kingdom of God (Mark xiii. 9 ; Luke
xxi. 12 ; Matt. x. 17)-
In contrast with the domineering forms of Gentile
sway (Mark x. 42-45 5 Luke xxii - 2 4 ‘ 3 ° 5 Matt,
xx. 25-28) is set
the brotherly service of the Kingdom of God.
Jesus here develops by contrast His theory of State-life.
The dispute which He was quelling was roused by political
ambition j and over against the false He sets the true
political ideal. Condemning ostentatious and domineer¬
ing authority He awards supremacy to service and masteiy
to ministry. In the Christian State the first place belongs
to the self-oblivious person who has most capacity and
will for the service of all.
As even the phrase itself, and still more its history
in Israel, remind us, the Kingdom of God is
56 THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
a political ideal, and in this aspect as in
others is to be the prime object of striving
(Luke xii. 31 ; Matt. vi. 33) and the ultimate
form of rule (Mark xiii. ; Luke xxi.; Matt,
xxiv. ; cf. Matt, xxviii. 18).
The Christian Theory of the State, or Christian
Politics.
Request : 1 Tim. ii. 2.
§ 64. The Heart of Man.
No one is good save God (Mark x. iS : Luke xviii.
19).
Men are sinners (Mark ii. 17 ; Luke v. 32 ; Matt.
i x * 13)? lost (Luke xix. 10), evil (Luke xi. 13 •
Matt. vii. 11).
Fiom the heait of man proceeds all manner of
evil and defilement (Mark vii. 15-23 ; Matt. xv.
11-20).
Yet men being evil know how to do good (Luke xi.
J 3 ’ Matt* vii. 11), and can even of themselves
judge that which is right (Luke xii. 57).
Hence the Kingdom proclaims the forgiveness of
sins (§ 38 and § 50),
and demands repentance (self-denial) and faith
in the good news (§ 40).
Request : Ps. Ii. 2.
ITS VARIOUS RECEPTION.
57
§ 65. The Realm of “Saving Health.”
Jesus uses the same word to denote healing,
saving, making whole (Mark v. 34; x. 52;
Luke vii. 50 ; viii. 50, &c.).
The Kingdom of God comes to a humanity
suffering under disease (§ 60), want (§ 6i),
oppression (§ 63), and sin (§ 64); and
chiefly by arousing faith is meant to make
humanity whole, free from all ills, physical,
economic, political, or spiritual; perfect
(Matt. v. 48).
Hence it is the Kingdom of Salvation (Mark x.
25-26, to enter it is to be saved) or Integra¬
tion, and stands first, before every other
aim and claim (Luke xii. 31; Matt vi. 33;
xiii. 44-46).
Request : Ps. lxi. 2.
§ 66. Its various Reception.
The Kingdom coming among the mixed elements
of human nature (§ 64) meets with various
reception ;
The good seed falls on many kinds of soil (Mark iv.
1-20 ; Luke viii. 4-15 ; Matt. xiii. 1-23).
Tares grow among the wheat (Matt. xiii. 24-30,
36 - 43 )-
Bad fish as well as good come into the net (Matt,
xiii. 47-50).
58
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Virgins wise and foolish await the Bridegroom
(Matt. xxv. i-13).
The Christ finds servants faithful and slothful (Luke
xix. 11-27; Matt. xxv. 14-30), and divides all
the nations into the sheep and the goats (Matt,
xxv. 32).
So He brings division (Luke xii. 51) even into the
homes of men (Luke xii. 52 f.; Matt. x. 35 ff) :
He brings on earth fire (Luke xii. 49) and
sword (Matt. x. 34).
Request : For singleness of heart.
F.—The Last Things.
§ 67. Death no bar to Life.
Death is no limit to the Kingdom of God (cf § 19).
The body may be killed and the soul be undestroyed
(Matt. x. 28).
The dead are raised: Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob
were alive in Moses’ day (Mark xii. 26 ff .;
Luke xx. 37 ff. ; Matt. xxii. 31 f);
all live unto God (Luke xx. 38).
Lazarus at death is carried into Abraham’s bosom
(Luke xvi. 22).
The dying thief was to be in Paradise the day he
died (Luke xxiii. 43).
The Son of Man was to die and rise again (Mark
viii. 31 ; Luke ix. 22 ; Matt. xvi. 21 ; and often),
was in Paradise the day He died (Luke xxiii. 43).
Request : For freedom from all fear of death.
THE DAY OF JUDGMENT.
59
§ 68. The Life toeyond Death.
When the dead arise they neither marry nor are
given in marriage (Mark xii. 25 ; Luke xx. 35 ;
Matt xxii. 30).
They cannot die any more (Luke xx. 36).
They are as (equal to) the angels {ibid).
This likeness to angels is a source of fresh information.
For
Angels are in heaven {ibid) in the presence of
God {cf. Luke xii. 8 and Matt. x. 32), are holy
(Mark viii. 38, &c.).
The angels of “these little ones” continually
behold the Father’s face (Matt, xviii. 10).
There is joy in their presence over one repenting
sinner (Luke xv. 10).
Angels carry Lazarus at death into Abraham’s
bosom (Luke xvi. 22).
More than twelve legions would be granted by
the Father at the request of Jesus (Matt. xxvi.
53)- , . .
Angels shall be attendants and mmistrants .of the
Son of Man when He comes to judgment
(Mark viii. 38, &c. ; Luke xii. 8, 9; Matt. xiii.
41, 49 i Mark xiii. 27, &c.).
Request : For a sense of living kinship with souls
beyond the veil.
§ 69 . Tire Day of Judgment.
The consummation of the age will come (Matt,
xiii. 40-49 ; xxiv. 3) when the Kingdom has
6o
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
grown from seed-time to harvest (Matt. xiii. 39),
at a time known only to the Father (Mark xiii.
32, &c.). See § 54.
The Son of Man will come sudden and manifest as
the lightning (Luke xvii. 24 ; Matt. xxiv. 27), in
power and great glory, in the clouds and with
the angels (Mark viii. 38 ; Luke ix. 26 ; Matt,
xvi. 27 ; Mark xiii. 26 ; Luke xxi. 27 ; Matt,
xxiv. 30 f).
Then (presumably) heaven and earth shall pass
away (Mark xiii. 31 ; Luke xxi. 33 ; Matt,
xxiv. 35 ; cf. Isa. lxv. 17 ; lxvi. 22).
There shall be brought before Him His servants
(Luke xix. 15 ff.\ Matt. xxv. 19 ff.) and all the
nations (Matt. xxv. 32)
for Judgment (Luke x. 14 ; Matt. x. 15 ; xi.
22-24 ; Luke xi. 31, 32 ; Matt. xii. 41, 42).
Request : That we have boldness in the day of
judgment (1 John iv. 17).
§ 70. Whom the Kingdom excludes.
The wicked (Matt. xiii. 49 ; Luke xix. 22), the sloth¬
ful (Matt. xxv. 26), the unforgiving (Matt,
xviii. 35), those who cause stumbling (Matt,
xiii. 41), workers of lawlessness (Matt. vii. 23),
the unfaithful (Luke xii. 46), hypocrites (Mark
xii. 40; Matt. xxiv. 51), the impenitent (Luke
xi. 32 ; Matt. xii. 41), those who are ashamed of
the Son of Man (Mark viii. 38 ; Luke ix. 26)
or deny Him (Luke xii. 9 ; Matt. x. 33), or
neglect Him in the least of His brethren (Matt.
THE DOOM.
6l
xxv. 46), or blaspheme against the Holy Spirit
(Mark iii. 29 ; Luke xii. 10 ; Matt. xii. 32) ; or
generally those who do not their Lord’s will
(Luke xii. 47 , 48) or the will of God (Matt,
vii. 21 ff.\ are
condemned.
§ 71 . Whom the Kingdom receives.
The righteous (Matt. xiii. 43 ; xxv - 46 ), the good
and faithful servants (Luke xix. 17 ; Matt. xxv.
21-23 ; Luke xii. 4 2 5 Matt. xxiv. 45), those who
make the poor a feast (Luke xiv. 14), who do
service to the Son of Man in the least of His
brethren (Matt. xxv. 4°), who confess Him
before men (Luke xii. 8 ; Matt. x. 3 2 ), the elect
(Mark xiii. 27 ; Matt. xxiv. 31), are
approved.
Request : For heavenly-minded service here.
§ 72. The Doom.
Exclusion from the Kingdom and the Christ (Mark
ix. 47, &c.; Matt. vii. 23; xxv. 41), a punish¬
ment (Matt. xxv. 46) set forth under the figures
of gehenna (Mark ix. 43 # 5 MaU - xviii. 9), un¬
quenchable fire and undying worm (Mark
ix. 48), eternal fire (Matt, xviii. 8), furnace of
lire (Matt. xiii. 42, 5 °), outer darkness (Matt,
viii. 12 ; xxii. 13 ; xxv. 30), weeping and gnash¬
ing of teeth (Luke xiii. 28 ; Matt. viii. 12 ; xxii.
62
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
13 ; xxiv. 51 ; xxv. 30), torments (Matt, xviii.
34 ) ;
said in Matt. xxv. 46 to be eternal, but graduated
according to desert (Luke xii. 47, 48).
§ 73. The Meed.
Confession by the Son of Man before His Father
(Matt. x. 32).
Blessing of His Father (Matt. xxv. 34).
Welcome by Him into the Kingdom prepared
(Matt. xxv. 34).
Welcome by friends into eternal tabernacles (Luke
xvi. Cf).
Sunlike radiance in the Father’s Kingdom (Matt,
xiii. 43).
Continued activity, but in more honourable service
(Luke xii. 44 ; xix. 17-19 ; Matt. xxv. 21-23).
Social festivity of the gladdest kind (Luke xiv. 16;
Matt. xxii. 2xxv. 10)
with patriarchs and all the prophets and many
from north and south and east and west (Luke
xiii. 2% Matt. viii. 11) ; and
with the Christ (Mark xiv. 25 ; Luke xxii. 18, 30 ;
Matt. xxvi. 29)
prefigured by the Lord’s Supper {ibid).
Joy (Matt. xxv. 21-23).
Bliss (Luke vi. 20-22; Matt. v. 3-11), the mere
prospect of which should cause exultant re¬
joicing (Luke vi. 23 ; Matt. v. 12).
Life (Mark ix. 43/), even eternal life (Mark x. 30 ;
Luke xviii. 30; Matt. xix. 29 ; xxv. 46),
SUMMARY OF SYNOPTIC SA Y/NGS. 63
the meed common to all (Matt. xx. 1 but
not excluding different grades (Luke xix. 17-19)*
This is the Kingdom of God (Matt. xxv. 34 5 Mark
ix. 45 , 47 5 x. 17, 23, 30, &c.; Luke xxii. 29).
Thanksgiving. Col. i. 12.
§ 74. Summary of Synoptic Sayings.
The Class will have now completed the parallel lines of
study. The Kingdom has been traced in its Gradual
Unfolding in the ministry of Jesus; and the Collective
Statement has been bit by bit assimilated. We shall do
well to look back over the way we have come. Of the
kind of Review suggested a specimen is here given. With
the retrospect it mingles glimpses of the coming Apostolic
development, but this is quite in keeping with the close of
one session which should not be without hint of the next.
The Class might with advantage be thrown open to the
public on the occasion ; or it might form the theme of
address to one of the Sunday congregations. It might be
announced under the heading
WHAT IS THE GOSPEL
as Jesus preached it?
The Gospel of Jesus Christ is in the mind of
millions to-day. There are millions of human
beings busy every Sunday hearing or reading or
talking about the Gospel. Yet how few there are
who could tell you clearly and shortly what it is.
Men know the power of it. Their hearts and lives
have been renewed by it. But what it is they would
be slow to say. Even those who try to tell you,
64
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
rarely derive their language from the Fountain
Head. They will take it from almost every source
except the words of Christ Himself. They will
quote from sermon or catechism or creed. Or if
they do go to the Bible, they will be sure to quote
not from Jesus, but from Paul or John. You can
generally see that they have not tried to get their
notion of the Gospel from the sayings of our Lord.
Or at least they do not seem to think His words best
fitted to express it. You will miss some of His most
characteristic phrases from their account of the
Gospel.
Tell them roundly, that the Kingdom of God is
THE CENTRAL THEME OF THE GOSPEL,
and they will probably look at you with surprise.
Perhaps they will at first think that you are not
sound in the faith. Then you get them to take up
their New Testament. You show them verse after
verse : nay, whole paragraphs of our Lord’s teaching.
You point out that He is always using the phrase
“ the Kingdom of God ” ; in public and private ; in
parable and blessing and charge. You prove beyond
all doubt or gainsaying that His Gospel is essen¬
tially “ the Gospel of the Kingdom ” (Matt. iv. 23 ;
ix. 35 ; xxiv. 14).
Then most likely they become puzzled. An air of
perplexity creeps over them. Perhaps they thought
they knew all about the Gospel. Yet of the King¬
dom which now they learn is the burden of the
Gospel they have only the vaguest idea. They have
come across the phrase almost every time they have
turned the pages of the Evangelists. But how
SUMMAR Y OF SYNOPTIC SA Y 1 NGS. 65
seldom they have asked, What is the Kingdom of
God ? The Kingdom of Heaven is a term they are
slightly more familiar with ; though it occurs only
in Matthew and nowhere else in the New Testa¬
ment. They have very often supposed that that
was only another name for Heaven itself. To say
of the children that “of such is the Kingdom of
Heaven ” is, they imagine, no more than saying that
a great many children are in Heaven. Yet it is
evident that the Kingdom of Heaven means just the
same as the Kingdom of God. But of either they
have at best very confused and uncertain ideas.
What is the Kingdom of God ?
This being so, shall we not try to get some clearer
notions ? Let us inquire
(I.) What we are to understand by that Kingdom
of God which Jesus set in the forefront of His
Gospel.
(1) The words mean literally “the Royal Rule of
God.” In some parts of the Bible they are used of
the eternal sovereignty of God. God has always
governed every part of the creation. So the psalmist
said, “His Kingdom ruleth over all” (Ps. ciii. 19).
But they cannot be used in that sense here. Jesus
spoke of the Kingdom of God as a new thing
coming into the world. He first (Mark i. 15) pio-
claimed “It is at hand.” He said, “John the
Baptist is greatest of woman-born, but he that is
but little in the Kingdom is greater than he” (Luke
vii. 28). The Baptist was evidently not in the
Kingdom. At a later time He said, “ If I by the
finger of God cast out evil spirits, then has the
2 E
66
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Kingdom of God come upon you” (Luke xi. 20).
No longer merely at hand, it has come. And to the
Pharisees asking when it should come, He answered,
“ Lo ! the Kingdom is in the midst of you” (Luke
xvii. 21). It is plainly manifest that the Kingdom
of God came into being on earth with and through
Jesus. Here therefore it is not the eternal and
universal sovereignty of God. It is rather the
Royal Rule of God realized in the responsive atti¬
tude of subjects. It is the realm as well as the
reign. It is a State therefore, a Community with
Head and Members : a Commonwealth, a Society
or Fellowship of Souls Divine and human. The
coming of this
Fellowship of Souls
forms the Good News of the Gospel of Jesus Christ
(Mark i. 15).
(2) But to know that the Kingdom is a Fellowship
of souls Divine and human is to know very little.
We go on to ask, what like is the fellowship ? What
are its qualities ?
Well, since God is a righteous Being, His King¬
dom is a reign and realm of Righteousness. But
this righteousness is no narrow or legal correct¬
ness. It is something exceedingly broad and high.
“ Except your righteousness exceed that of the
Scribes and Pharisees,” said the Master,—except
you have a nobler idea of conduct than simply the
punctilious discharge of external rules,—“ ye shall
in nowise enter into the Kingdom” (Matt. v. 20).
Only he shall enter that doeth the Will of My
Fatherin Heaven (Matt. vii. 21).
SUMMARY OF SYNOPTIC SAYINGS. 67
The righteousness to be striven after is obedience
to a Law : a Law which covers the entire round of
life down to the minutest detail. But this Law is no
statute-book. It is a spirit of conduct. It is a
conscience,—not a code. It cannot therefore .be
fully written out in a string of regulations. But it
can be
Summed up in one word —LOVE.
Thou shalt love thy God and thy neighbour. On
this commandment hang all the Law and the pro¬
phets (Matt. xxii. 37-40).
The Kingdom, then, is a fellowship of souls ,
divine and human , of which the Law and the Life
are Love.
(3) We may get at its meaning in another way.
We may ask how we are to think, not of the Law,
but of the Persons composing this august com¬
munity.
How are we to think of the Sovereign,—of the
God whose is the Kingdom? Jesus answers, As
Father, My Father, Father of all men.
Flow of the subjects or citizens of the Kingdom?
Again Jesus answers, “Ye are all brothers:
brothers because One is your Father” (Matt, xxiii.
8-10).
The Kingdom, then, is the fellowship of
Fatherhood and Brotherhood.
(4) But Fatherhood, Brotherhood, Love, mean
much or little according to the standard we conceive
them by. To one who is the child of shame and
68
THE KINGDOM OF GOD. .
the sport of cruelty from birth, the words are only
hateful. Where shall we find our standard ?
Where, save in Him who brought in the King¬
dom? If we ask, What like is the Fatherhood?
Jesus replies, He that hath seen Me hath seen the
Father also (John xiv. 9). If we want to know the
kind of the brotherhood, Jesus tells us, Inasmuch
as ye have done it unto one of the least of these My
brethren, ye have done it unto Me (Matt. xxv. 40).
Brotherhood is sympathy that rises toward Identity.
If we inquire, What sort of love is meant, Jesus
makes answer, Love as I have loved you (John
xiii. 34).
Thus Jesus fixes our thought of the Kingdom.
To use the Hebrew phrase,
Jesus is “the Christ.”
That is a great affirmation. We rarely grasp its
greatness. The Christ denotes the Anointed Ruler
in the Kingdom of God. It was the title given to
the King in ancient Israel. The realm of Israel
was the type or rough draft in miniature of the
Kingdom of God. David was in his day the Lord’s
Anointed—that is to say, the Christ of God. When
the type had gone, and the fulfilment had come,
Peter declared Jesus to be the Christ,—the Anointed
Plead of the Kingdom (Mark viii. 29). Every time
you use the word Christ , you pronounce Jesus to be
King in the sacred community of souls. As Christ,
He is regulative and decisive of what we are to
understand by the Kingdom. His obedience to the
Father shows us the Ideal Subject. His authority
over us reveals the Ideal Monarch. In His own
SUMMA RY OF S YNOPTIC SA YINGS. 69
Person He realizes the Ideal of the Kingdom. He
is in personal form what it is to be in social. All
the laws of the Kingdom are gathered into the one
command : Follow Me (Mark viii. 34, &c.).
Perhaps we may now try to
PACK INTO A SMALL BUNDLE
of speech what Jesus has said about the inner life of
the Kingdom. We shall describe later the relation
in which the Kingdom stands to the actual world,—
the conditions on which it is realized on earth. At
present we simply state what, according to His
sayings, it is in itself. The following working de¬
scription, which should be committed to memory,
gathers up the most essential features :—
The Kingdom of God is the fellowship of souls
Divine and human, of which the law and the life
are love, wherein the Fatherhood of God and the
Brotherhood of Man, as both are embodied in
fesus the Christ, are recognised and realized.
So in effect the Master describes it. So we learn
the truth of Paul’s great definition, which we shall
study more closely next session. The Apostle said,
“ The Kingdom of God is righteousness and peace
a 7 id joy in the Fdoly Spirit ” (Rom. xiv. 17). For
the Holy Spirit is the Life pervading the Kingdom,
inspiring its manifold activity, conserving its har¬
mony, and lifting the rhythm of its Dulses into the
melody of gladness.
(5) This is the Kingdom which Jesus announced,
which came into the world through Him, which was
7 o
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
established in His blood, and which has increasingly-
existed on earth ever since. We cry with John of
“ Him that loves us and loosed us from our sins in
His own blood, He made us to be a Kingdom unto
His God and Father !” (Rev. i. 5, 6).
And the Kingdom which He made is open to
every one. It is for all nations. It is freely offeree!
to all men.
Is not this Good News?
A fellowship of Christ-like love which is to include
every soul that is willing to enter ! A community
which embraces every other true community of men,
which contains and controls the Home, the State,
the Economic system, the fellowships of Science,
Letters, Art. A holy society already in the midst of
men, already shedding its brightness over human
life, yet shining more and more unto the perfect
day ; a Kingdom progressively realized on earth,
perfectly fulfilled in Heaven. A girdle of love
destined to clasp into unity the whole of mankind,
whatever the race, the colour, the culture, and to
bind all to the throne and heart of the Universal
Father!
Is not the arrival of such a society a glorious
piece of intelligence ? Is it not indeed good tidings
of great joy? Among all the dreams of social per¬
fectness which the fertile mind of man has flung
forth, you will not find one to equal this of the
Kingdom of God : its breadth, its height, its com¬
pleteness. And it is no mere dream : it is a fact in
process of growing fulfilment.
Gladdest of glad tidings, it is open to all !
5 UMMA RY OF S YNOP TIC SA YINGS. 7 *
II. But there are
CONDITIONS OF ENTRANCE.
(1) The Kingdom comes among men whose lives
are unfilial—they do not trust God as Father ; un-
fraternal—they do not treat men as brothers;
unloving—they are selfish and cold-hearted. Then
ere men can enter they must Repent! (Mark i. 15).
They must break away from the old life, the old
purpose, the old disposition. That and not mere
groaning over the past is what repentance means.
And they must believe in the Good News (Mark
i. 15). They must believe in God as Father, in
man as brother, in love as the true law of life, in
Jesus as the Christ, ere they can enter.
Is there one of us who does not need continually
afresh to repent and believe ?
(2) The terms of admission Jesus put in a more
striking way when He said to His ambitious
disciples, “ Except ye turn and become as little
children ye shall in nowise enter into the King¬
dom’' (Matt, xviii. 3). And at another time, as
He was taking the children up into His arms, He
said, “ Whosoever shall not receive the Kingdom of
God as a little child, shall in no wise enter therein ”
(Mark x. 15). So He reminded us that the fellow¬
ship of Divine Fatherhood and human brotherhood
is a gift, a boon, a largess. It cannot be earned by
good conduct. It is not withheld even from those
that have been evil doers. It is freely bestowed.
It is a gift of grace. Hence it absolutely shuts
out self-righteousness. It graciously forbids self¬
despair. It demands the attitude of the child—a
fl
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
spirit of receptive humility. In the phrase of Paul,
as we shall see more clearly next session, the only
justification it allows is
JUSTIFICATION BY FAITH.
(3) The demand of the Christ assumes a more
awful tone in the saying, “ If any man would come
after Me, let him deny himself and take up his
cross and follow Me. For whosoever would save his
life shall lose it; and whosoever shall lose his life
for My sake and the Gospel’s shall save it ” (Mark
viii. 34, 35).
“ Deny your self ” : not “practise certain acts of
self-denial,” but “ deny self utterly, renounce self
as principle of life, dethrone self as lord of life.”
“ d ake up your cross.” This does not merely mean
“ submit to the trials petty or ponderous which life
may bring,” but “ take your very life in your hands ;
shoulder your cross like the condemned criminal
when on his way from the hall of judgment to the
place of execution ( cf John xix. 17) : be prepared
for the worst of suffering and of shame for My
sake : follow Me at all risks and at all costs ! Regard
your life as lost for My sake,—
Die to self.”
Have you not found this condition to be essential?
Can you trust God as Father,—can you love men as
brothers,—can you follow Jesus as the Christ,—
unless you do die to self? Of what worth are heart¬
piercing regrets or elaborate confessions of in¬
tellectual belief unless the repentance and the faith
deepen into our being crucified with Christ and
SUMMARY OF SYNOPTIC SAYINGS. 73
rising with Him into newness of life ? (Rom. vi.
j-14). So Paul teaches us, as we shall see in our
next session.
These are stern conditions. But they are laid
down by the Christ Himself. They are imposed by
the very nature of the case.
And who that has seen the Christ and known
His Gospel, and won a glimpse of His glorious
fellowship, but would for Jesus’ sake repent, turn,
renounce, die to self?
Apart from Him we can do nothing. But we can
do all that He requires through Him strengthening
us. “Fear not,” He cries to us still, “fear not,
little flock ; it is your Father’s good pleasure to give
you the Kingdom ” (Luke xii. 32).
The Central and Creative Condition.
III. But these conditions of entrance push on
our inquiry a step further. We have seen what the
Kingdom is in itself. We have seen how persons
may pass into it ,—when it is already there for them
to enter it. We are forced to ask, How did it get
there? It is all very well to tell us how it may
become a fact in each man’s life. But we want to
know how it comes within reach, as it were, of
becoming a fact in each man’s life.
Let us look at it in this way. Into the Kingdom
already in existence, each soul can only enter by
a break with his sinful past, by a very real death to
self. But the self to which he dies, the sinful past
from which he breaks away, being found in each, is
common to all. It goes to make up what Paul and
others, as we shall see next session, call “ the world.”
74
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
As each person entering the Kingdom dies to the
world, we may fitly call the Kingdom a collective
death to the world. But how did this Kingdom get
itself established among men ? By what rupture
with the evil past of mankind did this organised
rupture with evil come into existence? By what
once-for-all decisive and original Death to the world,
did the Kingdom get a sure foothold on earth ?
Your answer is ready. It was by
The Death of Jesus.
We face here a great mystery. Jesus did not
often speak about the meaning of His Death. It
fell to His disciples, after they felt the effect of His
death, to tell what they had felt and to find out its
causes. As yet we can only speak vaguely, though,
as always on this theme, with awe. Reverently let
us try to piece together the little the Master has
said on it. The links we put in will be forgiven us,
if we only mean by them to make more clear His
thought.
Jesus was the Christ. As the Christ, He came
to set up on earth the Kingdom of God. He said
the Son of man must needs suffer a violent and
shameful death (Mark viii. 31).* The death of the
Christ was therefore a condition necessary to the
establishment of the Kingdom of God. The life of
Jesus, from the day when as a child He first knew
the difference between right and wrong, was one
* The sayings of Jesus concerning His Death which are
here connected are given and examined in § 51. Comparison
of the present review with that section may help to show
much not mentioned in either place.
SUMMAR Y OF SYNOPTIC SA YINGS. 75
long death to “the world.” Between the world of
sin and the Kingdom of God the antagonism was
mortal. But this antagonism could not remain hid
in the heart of Jesus or of other men. It must come
out in action. The world and the Kingdom were
great historic movements, and when they dashed,
great historic deeds must appear. The inward and
spiritual death must in the case of the Christ become
an outward and visible. His making the Kingdom
an overt reality led inevitably to His making the
death overt too. The metaphor must pass into
literal fact. His perfect obedience to the Father
cut asunder the continuity of human sinfulness and
opened out a new departure for the race, but it
could only do so by becoming an obedience even
unto death (Phil. ii. 8). Thus He died unto sin
once for all (Rom. vi. io).
“A Ransom.”
As the Kingdom of God is the Highest Good, the
Death which is bound up with the bringing of it to
men is a supreme act of service. Such was the way
in which “The Son of man came to serve” (Mark
x. 45). It was a service rendered to “many.” It
broke the hitherto unbroken tradition and sequence
of sin. It made a new beginning for men : which
they could follow up, but could not create. As all
service is vicarious action, so, and above all else,
was this Death. It was “ instead of many.” In it
One did for them what they ought to have done,
but because of their sin could not do. One bore
for them the task they could not bear, of confront¬
ing the onset of the organized and hereditary iniquity
76
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
of mankind and conquering it. “His life” was “a
ransom.” It was “given” as the price of their
deliverance from a doom they could not otherwise
avoid.
A Sacrifice.
It was a sacrificial death. At the last Supper He
implied that His Blood was like that of the burnt-
offerings and peace-offerings which Moses offered
at Sinai (Exodus xxiv. 4-8). He offered up His life
to the Father. The Will of God was unchangeably
fixed on setting up His Kingdom on earth, and
therefore on requiring the Death which that made
necessary. It was the cup which His Father had
given Him to drink (John xviii. 11). And He drank
it. The supreme act of service to men was the
supreme act of devotion to God.
“My Blood of the Covenant.”
It ratified “the New Covenant” (Mark xiv.
22-24). It settled the new kind of relations which
came in with the Kingdom. It certified the Father¬
hood, which would not refuse forgiveness to man’s
crowning act of disobedience (Luke xxiii. 34). It
attested a Sonship so perfect as to hold back
nothing, not even life itself, from the Will of the
Father. It sealed the Brotherhood which the worst
of hate and spite could not tempt the Son of man to
disavow. It maintained the Law of Love sovereign
and unbroken to the end. It achieved a Fellowship
of God and man which sin in all the range of its
wickedness and in the climax of its audacity could
not sunder or destroy. It utterly condemned sin.
SUMMARY OF SYNOPTIC SA YINGS. 77
-- —— - —
Complete devotion to the tie which binds the human
child to the Divine Father meant infinite abhor¬
rence of the sin which sought to weaken and sever
that tie. The broken heart of our Lord declared
with what mortal revulsion He encountered the sin
of the world, and with what self-consuming love He
sorrowed over the souls that sinned.
What has transpired so far.
So He accomplished the work given Him to do.
He established the Kingdom. The Divine Ideal
was an achieved reality, fixed on foundations
which nothing could shake. Of this transcendent
deed there are many aspects which we cannot yet
behold ; the later thought of the Apostles and the
growing life of mankind will be needed to disclose
them ; but even now we see that in the Death of the
Christ there was an absolute negation of the world,
an absolute affirmation of the Kingdom.
So it marks the new Exodus. It delivers from a
worse than Egyptian bondage (of which the Pass-
over was a reminder). It releases prisoners from
the pit of despair (Zech. ix. 9-11). To all who in
in their measure share in it, who drink of this cup,
who die to the world and live to the Kingdom, it
ensures the blessings of the New Covenant (Jer.
xxxi. 31-34), —forgiveness of sins, personal intimacy
with God, and a conscience which ever bears en¬
graved upon it the Divine commands. It has
inaugurated the Kingdom as a distinct and inde¬
pendent and indestructible reality.
In this reminder of the way we have come, I may
seem to have spoken most of that of which the
78
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Master said least. But the central and creative
condition was by Him accomplished rather than
described. His brevity of speech must not lead us
to misjudge the relative value of His deeds. Just
because you might overlook this prime factor of the
Divine Fellowship, I have laid much stress on it
here.
'
Bible Class primers.
EDITED BY PRINCIPAL SALMOND, D.D., ABERDEEN
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
A PLAN OF STUDY
IN THREE PARTS,
!•—The Kingdom in Israel.
II.— The Kingdom in the Synoptic Sayings of Jesus.
III. —The Kingdom in Apostolic Times.
BY
F. HERBERT STEAD, M.A.,
AUTHOR OF “ A HANDBOOK ON YOUNG PEOPLE’S GUILDS.”
III.—'THE KINGDOM IN APOSTOLIC TIMES.
€i>itttutrgh:
T. & T. CLARK, 38 GEORGE STREET.
LONDON : SIMPKIN. MARSHALL, HAMILTON, KENT & CO., Ltd.
.
*
• .
CONTENTS.
Part Gbirb:
THE KINGDOM IN APOSTOLIC TIMES
§§ 75-97 .
• • • .
T. he Kingdom as actual product, § 75. The
Kingdom as Church, § 76. The Forty Years'
1 ransition, § 77. The Message of the First
Heralds, § 78. On the Epistles, § 79.
A. The Kingdom according to Paul, §§ 80-90 .
The Vital Fact, § 80. The Social Organism,
§ 81. The Old Man and the New, § 82. The
Death-Birth, § 83. Transcorporation, § 84.
The Home of the Adopted, § 85. The Realm
of the Justified, § 86. The Synoptic Idea in
Paul, § 87. In whom all things consist, § 88.
The Law of the Spirit of Life, § 89. The
Several Spheres, § 90.
B. The Kingdom according to other New Testament
writers, §§ 9I - 9 6.
The Epistle of Hope (t Peter), § 9I . The Epistle
of Practical Wisdom (James), § 92. The
PAGE
7-66
21-47
47-65
6
CONTENTS.
Apology of the Transition (Hebrews), § 93.
The Vision of the Kingdom Triumphant (Rev.),
§ 94. The Epistle of Love (1 John), § 95. The
Last Memoirs of the Christ (John), § 96.
Finale, § 97 ....
BppenMj 5.
How Later Thinkers put it.
PAGE
65, 66
67
BppettMj 5$.
The Witness of Imperial History to the Kingdom . 80
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
THIRD PART.
THE KINGDOM OF GOD IN APOSTOLIC
TIMES.
After having studied together Parts I. and II., the
Class may be expected to possess a measure of
insight into the main drift of Scripture. General
principles and broad outlines, rather than details,
will now be in demand. The following order
of procedure may be felt more helpful:—
Frayer by any member (including Request).
Teacher expounds the one or more sections chosen for
the evening.
Questioning and general discussion on what he has
advanced.
Benediction.
In this Part, which deals with the experience pro¬
duced by Jesus, the discussions should as far as
possible take an experimental turn, comparing
and verifying the Christian consciousness of the
first century and of the nineteenth.
8
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
§ 75. The Kingdom as actual Product.
Jesus, the Christ, crowning the divinely inspired
development of Israel, gives us, as we have
seen, the decisive idea of the Kingdom. Him¬
self and His word, standing out from the Old
Testament background, are our supreme
authority.
Why, then (men may ask), trouble to study the
Kingdom as the Apostles present it ? Why go
beyond His sayings, since His speech is final ?
Because to know a cause we must know its effects.
Jesus on earth was much more than either His
sayings or His life-story. He was a creative
power. He was a vital cause. He is to be
known, therefore, not merely in His biographies,
but in the men whom He created anew, and in
their confessed experience. He not merely
stated and worked for the ideal of the King¬
dom : He brought it into actual existence : it
was made real in the life of His disciples.
To know what the Kingdom is, we look, there¬
fore, at the Kingdom which was the direct and
immediate product of His activity. The doings
and teachings of the Apostolic company may
have thus great value for us.
True, the effects of The Christ’s work are with us
to-day. “We are His workmanship” (Eph. ii.
io). The Kingdom which is now in the midst
of us is His product. All Christian history
and our own holiest experience are results of
His action, which still go on revealing Him
and His Kingdom. For this and other reasons
THE KINGDOM AS CHURCH.
9
we shall not try to make an exhaustive analysis
of the Apostolic writings. We shall only point
out in general terms the way in which the
Apostles felt, and thought, and practised the
truths of the Kingdom. Members of the Class
have already (§§ 31-74) got before them pretty
fully what the Master said and did in bringing
in the Kingdom : with such suggestions as are
now to be given they may “ verify results ” for
themselves in private study of the Epistles,
as also in the observation and still more the
experience of modern religious life.
Nevertheless, Apostolic experience, because the first
result, remains for ever fontal. It bears the
immediate impress of Jesus’ historical person¬
ality and ministry. Criticism may eliminate
from it effects due to other causes, but it none
the less abides as an authoritative standard of
true Christian experience.
Key-Text. 2 Cor. iii. 3.
Request : That God may lead us in triumph and
diffuse through us the fragrance of His truth
(2 Cor. ii. 14).
§ 76 . The Kingdom as Church.
After Jesus’ ascension, the subjects of the Kingdom,
as they came together to pray and to consult
concerning the Kingdom, and to try to extend
it, became intensely aware of possessing a
common Life (Acts ii., &c.). They knew that
It belonged to them only as members of the
IO
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Kingdom and marked off theirs from other
societies {cf. i Cor. xii. 3).
This was the Life of God which forms, and fills,
and spreads His Kingdom {cf. 1 Cor. vi. 17 ;
Rom. xiv. 17; Acts i. 8). It was Power from
on high (Luke xxiv. 49).
It was the Holy Spirit.
This intense consciousness of the Life, and Power,
and Spirit of the Kingdom returned to the
disciples as often as they met in the name of
the Christ to enjoy and to extend communion
with God and man (Acts ii. ; iv. 31 ff. ; x. 33
and 44, &c.).
Viewed as a society assembling for these purposes
(worship, edification, evangelism) they may be
described as the Kingdom corporately and
aggressively conscious of itself.
But the members of the Israelitish State—the
“ Kingdom of priests ” (Ex. xix. 6)—when re¬
garded as a worshipping (Numbers, Leviticus,
Psalms, &c.), deliberative (Josh. ix. 19;
Judg. xx. ; xxi. 13), militant (Num. xxvii. 17 ;
Judg. xx., xxi.) assembly, were called Qahal.
This Hebrew word, which is rendered in our
A. V. congregation , was translated in the Greek
Bible by Ekklesia.
Ekklesia was the name given in the New Testament
to the members of the evangelic Kingdom in an
analogous capacity. The English for it in the
New Testament is Church.
“The Church,” then, is to the New Kingdom,
broadly speaking, what “ the Congregation ”
was to the Old Kingdom: it is the Kingdom in
THE KINGDOM AS CHURCH.
n
one of its phases : it consists of all members of
the Kingdom in a given capacity.
The classical use of the word Ekklesia , as denoting the
folk-mote or general assembly of the citizens of a
Greek State, may have lent some shade of meaning to
the New Testament idea.
The Church is the Kingdom in its phase of cor¬
porate and aggressive self-consciousness .*
The word “ Church ” occurs only thrice in the re¬
corded sayings of Jesus (Matt. xvi. 18 ; xviii.
17 a, 1 7 b).
All three cases are found in only one source, Matthew,
the Gospel for the Hebrews.
But when Jesus appointed Twelve whom also He
named Apostles, that they might be with Him
and that He might send them forth to preach
(Mark iii. 14), He actually founded the Church.
This Key-Text describes the open fellowship with the
Master and the organized propaganda which made of
the Apostles a Church. It was already, in functions
and persons, fundamentally one with the society
which, after the ascension, was called the Church.
Therefore, when Jesus was first confessed by His
Apostles to be the Christ, He might well have
spoken of “ His Church,” and have predicted
for it, based on that confession, a stability secure
against all hostile powers (Matt. xvi. 18).
* For a more precise and detailed development of the dis¬
tinction, see my essay on ‘ ‘ The Kingdom and the Church
in “Faith and Criticism” (Sampson, Low & Co., 1893),
pp. 320-351.
12
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
After His ascension the idea of the Church came
more and more to the fore.
Request : Eph. i. 17-23.
§ 77. The Forty Years’ Transition.
At the Crucifixion (a.d. 30), the Kingdom on earth
was almost entirely made up of Jews. At
the fall of Jerusalem (a.d. 70) it contained
a majority of Gentiles. For more than a
thousand years the Kingdom of God had been
foreshadowed and prepared for in Israel. Its
Founder and first subjects, its sacred writings,
and most of its forms of thinking were Israelitish.
Yet in forty years after its actual advent, the King¬
dom was chiefly a Gentile community loosed
from the Law of Israel; and the national life
of Israel, which had been the historical seat
of the Kingdom, was finally shattered to pieces.
In the expansion of the Kingdom beyond the con¬
fines of Israel, six principal stages may be
noted.
That the Kingdom of God should, when it came,
include all nations, was a common-place of
Hebrew prophecy. But most of the prophets
and seers had expected that the Kingdom
would centre in Zion, and would extend the
forms of Israelitish life over the rest of the
world as over subject races. On the other
hand, there was nothing merely Jewish in the
conditions which Jesus laid down for entrance
into the Kingdom. Repentance and faith, self-
THE FORTY YEARS' TRANSITION. 13
denial and devotion to the Christ do not touch
differences of race or ritual.
The question before the primitive Church was not
whether the Gentiles could be admitted into
the Kingdom, but whether, in order to be
admitted, they had first to become Jews.
The original Apostles seem to have made no spon¬
taneous effort to bring the Gentiles within the
Kingdom on any terms. Pioneers arose outside
their circle.
a — Stephen the Pioneer. A.D. 34.
The first effort to loose the Kingdom from its Jewish
swaddling-bands appeared among the Hellenists
(Greek-speaking Jews) and not among the
Hebrews (Acts vi. 1-6). Stephen, one of the
Seven, himself most probably a Hellenist, dis¬
puted in the synagogues of the Hellenists (vi.
8-10). He seems to have pointed to the King¬
dom becoming independent of the Temple and
of the Law of Moses (vi. n-14). His defence
(Acts vii.) went to prove that Israel, as a
nation, persistently rejected the purpose of
God, and his list of Israel’s apostasies ended by
recounting the building of the Temple (vii. 47 f ).
The persecution which began with his martyrdom
helped to spread the kingdom (viii. 1-4).
b — F 7 'om Jerusalem to Samaria.
Philip (not the Apostle, see viii. 14) went outside the
Jewish pale and brought many Samaritans into
the Kingdom (viii. 5-13).
14
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
c — The First Gentile Church.
The great and decisive step of bringing pure Gentiles
into the Kingdom was taken at Antioch. Certain
nameless men of Cyprus and Cyrene, driven
from Jerusalem by the persecution in which
Stephen fell, and arriving in Antioch, preached
no longer to Jews merely, but to Greeks : of
whom a great number believed (Acts xi. 19-21).
Thus,
At Antioch was formed the first (recorded) Gentile
Church (xi. 26) ;
At Antioch the subjects of the Kingdom first received
their historic title of Christians.
No longer a mere sect of the Jews, but an independent
religious community, they obtained (possibly from
the Roman authorities) a distinctive name.
Antioch became for many years the capital 01 ex¬
panding Christendom.
Thither came Barnabas, and thither he brought
from Tarsus the man who, above all others, was
to prove the Kingdom free from all Jewish
bonds (Acts xi. 22-26),—
Saul, a Pharisee of pure Jewish blood, a native of
Hellenistic Tarsus, and a Roman citizen,
formerly a persecutor of the Church, but con¬
verted (a.d. 35) by a late revelation of the Risen
Christ (Gal. i. 16 ; 1 Cor. xv. 8).
Peter’s visit to Cornelius (Acts x.) does not seem to
have been followed up from Jerusalem by
further evangelism among the Gentiles. The
historic movement was in and from Antioch.
THE FORTY YEARS’ TRANSITION. 15
d—Rapid Extension among the Gentiles.
It was from the Church at Antioch that Christian
Evangelists went forth on their first organized
missionary tour among the Gentiles. Paul and
Barnabas went through Cyprus, Pamphylia,
Pisidia, and Lycaonia, achieving remarkable
success in making converts and planting
Churches of Gentiles (Acts xiii., xiv.).
e—The Threatened Schism Averted.
The inevitable controversy broke out. Must the
Gentiles, who were now crowding into the
Kingdom, become Jews in order to become
Christians? Many Jewish Christians answered
“ Yes,” and sought so to persuade the Gentile
converts. Paul and Barnabas, as Apostles of
the uncircumcision, answered “No.” The
quarrel grew. To prevent schism,
Paul and Barnabas went up to Jerusalem (a.d. 51)
to confer with the earlier Apostles. As a result,
“the gospel of the uncircumcision” and its
Apostles were approved, and the freedom of the
Gentiles from the Jewish law was ratified
(Gal. ii.; Acts xv.).
Note the way in which schism was averted (Gal. ii.
7-10). There was a frank statement and a frank recog¬
nition of differences (a gospel of the uncircumcision
and a gospel of the circumcision):
a perception of the fundamental unity (He that
wrought for Peter wrought for me also);
a division of the field of labour (we unto the Gentiles,
they to the Jews) ;
__ THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
a mutual acknowledgment of fellowship; and co¬
operation in the service of the poor.
Have we not here the secret of the reunion of Chris¬
tendom to-day ?
This victory for the Gentiles was confirmed by
Peter’s visit to Antioch (Gal. ii. \\ ff.). This
Apostle of the circumcision himself lived “ as
did the Gentiles,” and when, afraid of a deputa¬
tion from James, he acted an inconsistent part
he received a scathing rebuke from Paul.
Thus two decades after Jesus’ death had sufficed to make
explicit the universal nature of His Kingdom.
f—Tke Kingdom in Europe and the Gospel in
Greek.
The next decade (51-61) includes Paul’s second and
third missionary tours (through most of what
we now call Asia Minor, through Macedonia,
llyricum, and Achaia), the writing of his chief
epistles, and finally his lodgment as prisoner in
Rome. The headquarters of the great Evan¬
gelist having moved from Antioch (Acts xi. 26-
xv - 35 ) t0 Ephesus (Acts xix. 1 ; xx. 31),
are now pitched in the capital of the world.
The Gospel has assumed permanent literary form.
g The Carcase to the Vziltures.
Within the next decade the Christians in Rome are
so numerous as to be made the objects of Im-
penal, persecution (a.d. 65). The Apostle of
the Circumcision and the Apostle ot the Un-
circumcision are martyred : and
Jerusalem falls before Titus.
17
THE M ESSAGE of the first heralds.
The life of the Kingdom has passed from the Jewish
nation. The corpse is given over to the Roman
eagles (Matt. xxiv. 58 ). The great transition is prac¬
tically complete.
Verily the Kingdom oi God has come with power
(Mark ix. i).
Key-Text : Gal. v. 6.
Request : Eph. vi. 24.
§ 78. The Message of the First Heralds.
The Kingdom of God is stated in Acts to have been
the theme of the Gospel preached by
Philip to the Samaritans (viii. 12), and by
Paul in Lystra and Iconium (xiv. 22),
during his three years ministry in and around
Ephesus (xix. 8 ; xx. 25),
and during his two years’ stay in Rome (xxviii
3i).
It was also the subject of his testimony in his All-
Day meeting with the chief Jews of Rome
(xxviii. 23).
The general idea of the Kingdom was involved and
defined in the statement, “Jesus is the Christ.”
This we find to have been the chief burden of
the Apostles in addressing Jews who were
familiar with the conceptions, Kingdom and
Christ, but strangers or enemies to Jesus.
So Peter at Pentecost (Acts ii. 36), and in Solo¬
mon’s Porch (iii. 20).
So Paul to the Jews of Damascus (ix. 22), Thessa-
3 B
i8
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
lonica (xvii. 3), and Corinth (xviii. 5) ( cf. “ Jesus
is the Son of God,” Acts ix. 20 ; Psalm ii. 2, 7).
So Apollos to the Jews in Achaia (Acts xviii. 28).
This message of the Coming of the Kingdom and of
the Christ-hood ot Jesus gave colour to the
charge, “ These all act contrary to the decrees
of Caesar, saying that there is another King,
one Jesus ” (xvii. 7).
That Jesus as the Christ is ordained Judge of quick
and dead was also a prominent part of the
message. So Peter before Cornelius (x. 42),
and Paul in the Areopagus (xvii. 31 ; cf. xxiv.
25).
Key-Text : Luke x. 9.
Request : For Apostolic heralds to-day.
§ 79. On the Epistles.
Certain features common to the Writings of the
Apostles and their next followers, which dis¬
tinguish them from the Sayings of Jesus, need
to be noted.
(a) In the Sayings the Kingdom of God is the
theme always recurring, and the Church is
barely mentioned. In the Writings the King¬
dom rarely occurs, while the Church is always
present. This change is partly due to (1) the
fact that the Epistles were written to Churches
and about Churches. A deeper reason is (2) that
the Church was the primary instrument for
realizing and extending the Kingdom, and, the
ON THE EPISTLES.
19
Kingdom having been already launched, the
Church, next and necessarily, demanded special
attention. But (3) it was like the Master to
lay the chief stress on the Kingdom, it was like
the disciple, in the changed circumstances, to lay
the chief stress on the Church. The standard
given us by the Master we must accept.
The Kingdom is the larger, the more comprehen¬
sive, and the more fundamental idea. The
Church is but one phase of the Kingdom’s life :
and only exists as a means to the realization of
the Kingdom.
This distinction should be kept well in mind. The sin
of ecclesiasticism results from identifying the King¬
dom with the Church. The Kingdom is not to be
narrowed down to the Church, nor the Church
evaporated into the Kingdom.
We shall study the leading ideas of the Epistles,
therefore, from the standpoint of Kingdom and
not of Church.
(b) Even where the Epistles mention the Kingdom,
it is generally the future Kingdom (§ 54), which
shall appear at the Second Advent of the
Christ.
The idea of the Kingdom as a thing already
existing on earth is not indeed wholly absent,
but is only seldom expressly cited.
The reason of this distribution of emphasis is
given in the universal expectation of the first
Christian generation that the Christ would very
speedily return to judge the world and establish
His Kingdom in glory (1 Cor. xv. 50 ; Rev.
20
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
xxii. 20 ; Heb. x. 25 ; 1 Peter iv. 7 ; James
v. 8, 9; 1 John ii. 18).
The splendour of that eagerly awaited consum¬
mation naturally flung the existing Kingdom
somewhat into shadow.
(c) For mankind, as existing apart from the King¬
dom, either as prior to its first advent, or as
now outside of it, a general term was soon felt
to be needed. The term common to nearly all
New Testament writers is “world” ( Kosmos )
or “this world.” “The world,” in this sense,
often comes to mean the opposite and enemy
of the Kingdom ; the rival power to be defied
and vanquished (Gal. iv. 3 ; vi. 14 ; 1 Cor. i. 20 ;
ii. 12, &c.; James iv. 4; i. 27 ; Rev. xi. 15;
1 John ii. 15-17 ; v. 4, 19); cf §§ 7, 26.
A kindred contrast, similarly common, is that
between light and darkness (1 Thess. v. 5 ; 2 Cor.
vi. 14; Rom. xiii. 12 ; Col. i. 13 ; 1 Petei
ii. 9 ; 1 John ii. 8, 11).
(d) It is not essential to the purpose stated above
(§ 75) t° go beyond the chief writings of the
New Testament or to fix the dates of every
writing we use.
The approximate dates at which, according to
pretty general agreement, Paul’s epistles were
written may be given :—1 and 2 Thessalonians,
54 A.D.; Galatians, 55 ; 1 and 2 Corinthians, 57 ;
Romans, 58 ; Philippians, Ephesians, Colos-
sians, Philemon, during his first imprisonment
in Rome, which began 61 ; 1 and 2 Timothy and
Titus during a second imprisonment in Rome.
Some think, however, that the epistles in which
THE VITAL FACT.
21
Paul appears to write as a prisoner were
written partly during his imprisonment at
Caesarea and partly during his imprisonment
in Rome ; and some judge differently of the
date and authorship of the Pastoral Epistles.
Key-Text : Matt. x. 24, 25a.
Request : For grace to use all things as ours,
whether Paul, or Apollos, or Cephas, that we
may be more fully Christ’s (1 Cor. iii. 22/).
A.—The Kingdom According to Paul.
§ 80 . The Vital Fact.
The secret of a man’s life gives the key to all his
thinking. What Paul declares to be the inmost
fact of his life fixes the point from which the
concentric circles of his thought, can, one after
another, be best seen and understood.
(1) In this direct utterance of his deepest experience we
have the truth at first hand. (2) When he throws
the truth so gained into figures taken from animal or
social life, or (3) when he puts it in such a form as to
suit Jewish or Greek ways of thinking, he has done
something to explain it, it is true ; but, as reflection
has come in, we now stand at one or more removes
from the original or vital fact. In other words, the
experience is of more decisive value than the explana¬
tion of the experience.
Now we find as the bed-rock of Paul’s religious
consciousness a certain Ide?itity of Life between
himself and the Christ. In an early epistle he
writes, (Key-Text) “ It is no longer I that livej
22
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
but Christ liveth in me ” (Gal. ii. 20) ; and in
one of the later epistles, “To me to live is
Christ” (Phil. i. 21). He is emphatically “a
man in Christ” (2 Cor. xii. 2). His conver¬
sion is the revealing of the Son of God in him
(Gal. i. 16). To be found in Christ is the aim
of his great self-renunciation (Phil. iii. 9). He
speaks in Christ (2 Cor. ii. 17 ; xii. 19). Christ
speaks in him (2 Cor. xiii. 3).
This experience he does not regard as only his own.
His intense social sympathy reveals, at the
deepest point where he and other souls can
meet, the same underlying Life. “Ye are in
Christ Jesus,” he says (1 Cor. i. 30), “Jesus
Christ is in you” (2 Cor. xiii. 5). He speaks of
“fellow-workers in Christ Jesus” (Rom. xvi. 3).
To be a subject of the Kingdom is, in his phrase, to
“be in Christ” (2 Cor. v. 17). Christians are,
when immature, “babes in Christ” (1 Cor. iii.
1). They are “saints in Christ Jesus” (Phil,
i. 1), “sanctified in Him”(i Cor. i. 2). They
were “baptized into Christ,” “ did put on Christ”
(Gal. iii. 27).
The Churches are to Paul “ Churches in Christ ” (1
Thess. ii. 14 ; Gal. i. 22). Their general Chris¬
tian activity is in Christ (Gal. v. 6, et passim).
“ Christ is our life” (Col. iii. 4). Jew and Greek,
bond and free, male and female, “ ye are all one
man in Christ Jesus ” (Gal. iii. 28), “Christ is
all and in all” (Col. iii. 11). Those who die fall
asleep in Christ (1 Cor. xv. 18), they are “the
dead in Christ” (1 Thess. iv. 16).
According to Paul the subjects of the Kingdom are
THE SOCIAL ORGANISM ,.
23
all, in some way, included in the personality of
the Christ.
Many people, faced with this fact, exclaim, “ That is
Paul’s mysticism,” and think they have so disposed
of it. It is not to be so easily dismissed. Here is
Paul, one of the chief spiritual experts of the race,
telling us the secret of his life. He is putting into
speech the deepest and most abiding fact of his own
experience and of the social experience which is also
intensely his own. And the concurrent testimony of
all his epistles, is that he and every other subject of
the Evangelic Kingdom are “in Christ,” are en¬
veloped in the folds of His personality. This is the
vital fact. This is the core of the Pauline universe.
It is not to be merely dubbed ‘ ‘ mystical ” and then
passed by. We have no right to empty Paul’s words
of their riches in order to bring them down to the
poverty of our experience.
In thus identifying, after a certain manner, the King¬
dom with the inclusive personality of the Christ, Paul
only gives vitality and substance to the truth suggested
by the synoptic sayings as summarized in § 52 : Jesus
embodies the ideal of the Kingdom.
Request: Eph. iii. 17.
§81. The Social Organism.
Paul helps us to grasp the vital fact by setting forth
the One Life which includes and pervades in¬
numerable lesser lives as an Organism. This
image, which is all but present when he says,
“Ye are all one man in Christ Jesus” (Gal. iii.
28), is drawn out at length in 1 Cor. xii. 12 ff.
24 THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
The Key-Text is, “As the body is one, and all
the members of the body being many are one
body , so also is (not the Church, but) Christ .”
So “ we who are many are one body (i Cor. x.
17) in Christ, and severally members one of
another” (Rom. xii. 5). The figure which runs
through these earlier epistles reappears in
slightly changed but fuller outline in Colossians
(i. 18, 24; ii. 17, 19 ; iii. 15), and in Ephesians
(i. 22, 23; ii. 16; iii. 6; iv. 4, 12-16, 25; v.
23 - 32 ).
According to Paul, the Christ and the subjects of
the Kingdom constitute a Social Organism.
The conception of the community as a social organism
is not, like the experience from which it springs, dis¬
missed by modern men as “mystical,” but is hailed
as having high scientific value. Mr Herbert Spencer,
in his “Principles of Sociology,” vol. i. part ii., has
sketched in detail the likenesses between the animal
and social frame. Industries form the alimentary
system of society; roads, canals, railroads, its blood¬
vessels ; telegraphs, its nerves ; the government, its
brain, &c.
But in his social organism Mr Spencer recognises no
central sensorium, or personal self-consciousness;
only a general sentiency and knowledge diffused by
language. Whereas Paul’s fontal idea is that his
social organism has a central sensorium—is one
colossal personality.
Request : Eph. iv. 14, 15.
THE OLD MAN AND THE NEW.
25
§ 82 . The Old Man and the New.
Over against the Organism of the Christ and His
members, or the New Man, which includes
Greek and Jew, barbarian and Scythian, bond
and free, male and female, in the all-pervading
unity of Christ (Gal. iii. 28 ; Col. iii. 11), stands
“The world” or “this world” (Gal. vi. 14; 1 Cor.
i. 20; ii. 12; iii. 19; vii. 33; xi. 32), or in
kindred contrast “the Old Man,” the old non-
Christian humanity (Rom. vi. 6 and Gal. vi. 14 ;
Col. iii. 9 ; cf. Eph. iv. 22). As the name and
parallel suggest,
This also is thought of as an Organism, “ the Body
of Sin ” (Rom. vi. 6), “ the Body of the flesh ”
(Col. ii. 11), with “members upon the earth”
(Col. iii. 5).
Hence there are two Social Organisms, the Old and
the New Humanity (the world and the King¬
dom), which are thus opposed :—
Of the Old. Of the New.
The character is
Sin,
Righteousness,
which resides in and
is transmitted by
the Flesh,
the Spirit,
the destiny being
Death,
Life, eternal life,
and the historical
origin being
Adam,
Christ.
For the first, third, and fourth contrasts, see
Rom. v. 12-21.
As to the second, observe that by “ flesh ” Paul
26
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
means not our physical body, but the diseased
principle of our moral and religious nature, the
principle which is the hereditary and personal
predisposition to sin ; or common human nature
as it now is, not only weak but vitiated and
sinful. See Gal. v. 16-24 > Rom. viii. 5-9, 12, 13.
But the members of the New Humanity have been
members of the Old Humanity, servants of sin
(Rom. vi. 17), walking after the flesh (vii. 5),
and under condemnation (iii. 19).
How, then, has the new Social Organism supervened
upon the old, or how has the transition from
old to new been effected ?
Key-Text : Eph. iv. 22/
Request : For daily deliverance from this body of
death (Romans vii. 24).
§ 83. The Death-Birth.
The New social organism had its “ rudiments ”
(Gal. iv. 3, 9), foreshadowings (Col. ii. 17), and
general preparation in the Old, as shown
in the individual conscience (Rom. vii. 22), in
the witness received from Nature (i. 19, 20 ; ii.
I 4 ) !5)> an d in the promises and covenants of
Revelation (Gal. iii., iv. ; Romans iii., iv. et
passim).
It first became actual in Jesus the Christ. By His
unique obedience (Phil. ii. 8), He introduced the
Reign of Righteousness : began the New
Order: brought in the Kingdom (Rom. v. 12 ff.).
THE DEATH-BIRTH .
27
But He was born of the Old social organism (Gal.
iv. 4), of the people of Israel and of the seed ol
David according to the flesh (Rom. ix. 5 ; i. 3),
in the likeness of sinful flesh (viii. 3).
In Him, therefore, the Old and the New meet —and
part.
Paul finds the historical point of transition in the
Death of Christ.
a. His sinlessness (2 Cor. v. 21) broke the continuity of
human sinfulness, and His Death is the historical
outcome of the rupture. The antagonism between
His righteousness and the world’s sin was uncompro¬
mising and proved itself to be mortal.
His life was one persistent “ death unto sin,” and
this death became complete in the crucifixion
(Rom. vi. 10, 11).
The New social organism was once for all severed from
the Old. New and Old were by the Cross crucified
to each other (Gal. vi. 14).
b> But the Death of Jesus was wholly undeserved. It
was voluntarily incurred by Him as involved in the
encounter of His New (perfect) Humanity with the
Old sinful Humanity. But He undertook this en¬
counter only in order to establish the New amid the
Old, that members of the Old might pass over into the
New. Thus His Death was for their benefit.
Christ died for the ungodly (Rom. v. 6, 8, &c.).
c. But Paul regarded Death as the doom of Sin (Rom. v.
12) , and a death on the tree as incurring the curse of
the Law (Gal. iii. 13). So
Christ in His Death became a curse for us (Gal. ii.
13) . Him who knew no sin God made to be
28
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
sin on our behalf (2 Cor. v. 21). God sent Him
as an offering for sin (Rom. viii. 3). God set
Him forth a Mercy-seat sprinkled with His own
blood (iii. 25).
By showing that the Divine forgiveness, whether to
saints of old or to subjects of the New Kingdom,
sprang from no light estimate of sin, but from an atti¬
tude towards it of mortal antagonism and heart¬
breaking revulsion, the Death of Christ showed the
righteousness of God in passing over sins done afore¬
time and in now receiving into the Realm of the
justified sinners who believed in Jesus (Rom. iii.
21-26).
Observe that righteousness is more than justice. What is
right is a larger notion than what is just. Hebrew
righteousness includes humanity as well as justice.
The root-meaning of Righteousness in the Old Testa¬
ment, says Professor Cheyne, “is firmness or tight¬
ness . hence it is the quality which leads one to
adhere to a fixed rule of conduct. God’s rule is His
covenant : hence righteousness shows itself in all such
acts as tend to the full realizing of the covenant with
Israel. Righteousness and loving kindness are
closely connected ideas.”
So Kautsch declares the root idea of (Hebrew) right¬
eousness to be conformity to a norm (cf Isaiah
xl.-lxvi., where righteousness = salvation).
The righteousness of God is therefore the consistency
and constancy with which He carries out His supreme
purpose of love in founding and completing His
Kingdom. As such it includes (but far transcends)
the element of penal or retributive justice. The
Death of Christ was, according to Paul, a setting
forth of the righteousness of God in the largest
sense.
TRANSCORPORA TION.
29
Whatever was necessary to free the New Organism
from the doom of guilt contracted by its members
while in the Old Organism was effected in the
crucifixion.
The Divine vitality of the New Organism was
historically attested by the Resurrection of the
Christ (1 Cor. xv. ; Rom. i. 4 ; vi.).
The crucifixion and resurrection thus form a Death-Birth.
The New social organism parted from the Old,
was severed from sin, flesh, and penal death.
Key-Text : Rom. vi: 6.
Thanks : Rev. v. 9/, 12.
§ 84. Transcorporation.
The breach which Jesus made in the continuity of
human sinfulness He made for all who avail
themselves of it (Rom. v. 12-21). Those who
cleave to Him keep up His line of cleavage
with the world.
By self-surrendering faith in Him they have
entered into an identity of life with Him (Gal.
ii. 20).
One died for all ; therefore all died : and He died
for all that they which live should no longer live
unto themselves but unto Him, who for their
sakes died and rose again (2 Cor. v. 14, 15).
They have died to sin ; they have become alive
unto God (Rom. vi.).
They have been crucified to the world and the
world to them (Gal. vi. 14).
30
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
They have crucified the flesh with its passions
and lusts (v. 24).
They have been crucified with Christ (ii. 20).
They have died with Him (Rom. vi. 8 ; Col.
ii. 20).
They have been raised with Christ (Col. iii. 1);
they are “ alive from the dead ” (Rom. vi. 13).
The old humanity was crucified with Him
(Rom. vi. 6). The Body of Sin was initially
done away {ibid.\ the Body of the Flesh was put
away (Col. ii. 11).
They have put off the Old Man : they have put
on the New Man (Col. iii. 9, 10) ; they have
put on Christ (Gal. iii. 27).
They have become members of His Body (§ 81).
They have, in a word, been cut away from the old
social organism : they have been transplanted into
the new. To alter slightly the Apostle’s use of the
figure, they were cut out of the wild olive tree and
were grafted into the good olive tree ( cf. Rom. xi. 24).
Of this process of transcorporation Paul supplies a
striking witness in his own experience (Gal.
ii. 20 ; and Phil. iii.).
It is identical with the detachment and attachment
which Jesus demanded ; repentance and faith ; death
to self and following Him ; “Die to Live.”
But the vital change from one organism to another
can only take place by the creative act of God.
If any man is in Christ, there is a new creation ; the
. old things are passed away ; they are become
new. But all things are of God who reconciled
us to Himself through Christ (2 Cor. v. 17, 18).
THE HOME OF THE ADOPTED.
3i
God fore-knows, fore-ordains, calls the members of
the new organism (Rom. viii. 29/.).
He delivered us out of the power of darkness and
translated us into the Kingdom of the Son of
His love (Col. i. 13).
Key-Text : Rom. vi. 5.
Request : Psalm li. 10.
§ 85 . The Home of the Adopted.
The sayings of Jesus have made us think of the
Kingdom chiefly as a family, wherein God is
Father, and men and women are brothers and
sisters in the Spirit of the Christ.
Paul attests the new family experience which Jesus
introduced. The fact which passages collated
in previous sections have set forth under the
image of an organism, is now set forth under the
image of a family.
Paul holds all men to be the offspring of God ( cf.
Acts xvii. 29) ; but before they become Christ¬
ians he regards them as children in a state of
nonage and servitude (Gal. iv. 1-3, 9).
But by faith in Jesus they enter into the privileges
of full sonship ; they receive the adoption of
sons (Gal. iv. 5), the spirit of adoption (Rom.
viii. 15), the Spirit of the Son of God, whereby
they cry Father, Father! (Gal. iv. 6; Rom.
viii. 15).
In Christ Jesus (Gal. iii. 26), and led by the Spirit
of God (Rom. viii. 14), they are all sons of God.
So they form a household of faith (Gal. vi. 10 ;
cf. Eph. ii. 19).
32
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
To explain Paul’s meaning by a Parable of his
Master’s : The prodigal in Luke xv. was a son in the
far country, but in his father’s welcome received “the
adoption of sons.”
The sonship and the brotherhood are modelled on
those of Jesus.
They began to be with Him. It is the prescient
purpose of God to conform men to the image of
His Son, that He might be the first-born
among many brethren (Rom. viii. 29).
Key-Text : Gal. iv. 3-5.
Request : For the filial and fraternal Spirit of oui
Lord (Luke xi. 13).
§ 86. The Realm of the Justified.
The fact of vital union has been set forth in Paul’s
figures of the Body and of the Family. It now
remains to set it forth in his figure of the State
with its courts of public justice.
This is a figure much more external than the other
two ; but owing to the intensely legal habit of
mind which ruled the Jews of his time, and to
which he himself had been trained, it receives
great emphasis from Paul.
The vital fact is that the believer, when by faith he
finds himself “ in Christ Jesus,” finds also that
his former sin no longer bars him from loving
access to the Father. Living unity with the
Christ precludes any Divine estrangement. That
is to say, in Him we have the forgiveness of
our sins (Col. i. 14). But there is consciousness
THE REALM OF THE JUSTIFIED.
33
of much more than bare forgiveness. The be¬
liever is “ in Christ,” is included in His person¬
ality, shares in His life, is invested, therefore,
with a positive worth before the Father.
Now put this fact of experience into the forensic
figure. It is not enough to say that the believer
has been pardoned, let off from the penal con¬
sequences of his sin. He is treated as though
he were acquitted, “ dismissed from court with¬
out a stain upon his character.” He is virtually,
by deeds of grace more eloquent than words,
pronounced righteous. He is justified. He is
awarded full civil rights in the Kingdom of God.
He is admitted to the public honour of close
intimacy with his Judge and King.
But how reconcile these forensic statements with
the proved guilt of all men (Rom. iii. 19).
How, save by a legal fiction, can God justify
the ungodly ?
We must turn once more to the central vital fact.
The believer, however sinful his past, is “in
Christ Jesus.” He has become incorporate
with the supremely Righteous Personality. It
is no longer he that lives, but Christ lives in
him (Gal. ii. 20). The All-Holy Life is his.
So incorporated and identified with Christ, he
is righteous : and what he is, God declares him
to be ; He justifies him. Faith in the Christ is
life surrender, it is the condition on which God
engrafts a man into the Christ. “Faith is
reckoned for righteousness” (Rom. iv. 5),
because it is the condition of inclusion in the
Righteous Personality.
3
C
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
34
But what of the sinful past of the believer? Paul
answers, He that hath died is justified from sin
(Rom. vi. 7, R. V.).
We died with Christ (ver. 8). Whatever penal
consequences were due to us have been dis¬
charged. We are so vitally one with Him that
His passion is ours. He died unto sin once for
all (ver. io), and that death is ours :
just as the engrafted branch shares in the permanent
effects of the previous history of the tree (Rom.
xi. 17).
But what of the sinful nature which the believer
brings with him ?
God does not justify that.
The old man, the body of sin, the body of the
flesh, the members which are upon the earth, are
not justified by God. They are not incorporate
with the Christ. They do not belong to the true
life of the believer. So far as they attach to him
at all, they are to be made dead (Col. iii. 5).
Every shred of tissue connecting him with them
must be cut or cauterised away.
God justifies the new true self, which is one with
the Christ.
To justify, to adopt, to incorporate or engraft are
(relative to the individual believei) the same
creative act of God whereby a man comes to be
“ in Christ Jesus.” The three figures are various
ways of describing the “ new creation ” (2 Cor.
v. 17).
Key-Text : Rom. viii. 1.
Request : Eph. iii. 16.
THE SYNOPTIC IDEA IN FACIE.
35
§ 87. Tlie Synoptic Idea in Paul.
Besides the foregoing figures, Paul uses also the
original phrase—so continually on Jesus’ lips
—of “ the Kingdom of God.” He uses it
chiefly in reference to the future consummation
(i Thess. ii. 12 ; 2 Thess. i. 5 ; Gal. v. 21 ; 1
Cor. vi. 9, 10 ; xv. 24, 50).
But he also uses it of the present.
The Kingdom of God is not in word but in power (1
Cor. iv. 20) : it is a movement not of human
plausibilities, but of Divine dynamic.
But the great passage is Rom. xiv. 17, where,
touching on the vexed question of meats, Paul
urges that the essence of Christian fellowship
does not lie in eating and drinking, or any such
external behaviour. No ;
Key-Text. The Kingdom of God is righteous¬
ness and peace and joy in the Holy Spirit.
For he that herein serveth the Christ is well
pleasing to God and approved of men.
Observe how strikingly this definition accords with the
epitome of the Synoptic sayings in § 74.
The three factors of fellowship given there appear
here,—God, men, the Christ.
Righteousness is “conformity to a norm ”—the norm
being the Divine Law or Will of love. Righteousness
is the conduct commanded by love.
Peace is the harmony which love secures between the
manifold varieties of righteous conduct.
Joy is the spontaneous outflow of the love that com¬
mands and organizes conduct.
But the Kingdom is more than a fellowship of in«
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
36
dividuals acting righteously, peaceably, joyously. It
possesses a Common Life which is Divine (1 Cor. vi.
17 ).
The fellowship of righteousness and peace and joy
is in the Holy Spirit. He who exercises this Divine
vitality serves the Christ: and, so serving the Christ,
wins the Fatherly commendation of God and the
brotherly approval of men.
“ Fellow-workers unto the Kingdom of God ” (Col.
iv. 11) may refer to either present or future
Kingdom, or both ; in any case the Kingdom
appears as a common task or work.
Col. i. 13 has been noted in § 84.
A kindred phrase occurs in Gal. vi. 16, “The
Israel of God,” which is equivalent to the entire
mass of subjects in the Kingdom.
Of this Kingdom Paul finds the source and seat and me¬
tropolis in Heaven.
The Jerusalem which is above is our mother (Gal.
iv. 26). So also
Our citizenship is in Heaven (Phil. iii. 20), which
suggests “ the Kingdom of Heaven.” So he
urges
Behave as citizens worthily of the Gospel of the
Christ (Phil. i. 27, R. V., marg.).
But though the Kingdom is not often mentioned by Paul,
he gives prominence to the (even verbally) kindred
idea of
The Reign of Grace (Rom. v. 21) with which is con¬
trasted the Reign of Sin (v. 21) or Reign of
Death (v. 14, 17).
The Reign of Sin began with the first man, bringing
Death as its consequence, and extended from him
IN WHOM ALL THINGS CONSIST.
37
over the entire race. The Law came in to deepen
man’s consciousness of sin, and of his own inability to
escape from it.
The Reign of Grace (“the Kingdom of God ”) begins
on earth with the One Man, Jesus Christ, and extends
over all who are in Him. It is designed to be
equally universal and more abundant (see whole pas¬
sage, Rom. v. 12-21).
To recapitulate : Our present purpose is not to
trace all the ins and outs of Paul’s doctrine, but
to show the broad resemblance between his
and the synoptic ideas.
What Jesus meant by the Kingdom of God reap¬
pears substantially in Paul
(1) under the same name, and also under the figures
of
(2) the Human Organism (the Body which is Christ),
(3) the Home of the Adopted,
(4) the Realm of the Justified,
(5) the Reign of Grace,
(6) the Heavenly Citizenship.
Request : Rom. xv. 13.
§ 88. In Whom all things consist.
In the Pauline epistles the Anointed Ruler in the
Kingdom of God is called Christ 129 times ;
Lord possibly * 98 times ; The Lord possibly 97
times ; The Christ 86 times ; CJtrist Jesus 87
*" Possibly,” because we cannot always say whether
“ Lord ” refers to Jesus or to His Father. Cf my “ Pauline
names for Jesus,” in The Expositor, May 1888, pp. 386-395.
38
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
times ; Jesus Christ 78 times ; Our Lord 54
times ; Jesus 47 times ; Son of God 17 times.
Jesus’ own title, The Son of Man , never occurs.
The Messianic name is becoming proper and
personal ( Christ 129 times) rather than common
and official ( The Christ 86 times).
The official title with Paul is therefore chiefly Lord
(in all forms certainly 129 times and possibly
249).
The confession which marks a man a Christian is
that “ Jesus is Lord ” (1 Cor. xii. 3 ; Rom. x. 9 ;
Phil. ii. 11).
This is the Apostolic echo of the Master’s demand,
“Follow Me.” The idea common to both is,
obviously, that of the decisive Authority of Jesus.
But Paul, as we have seen (§ 80), does not conceive
of this Authority as arbitrary or external, but as
vital and pervasive. All that believe in Him
are felt to be incorporate with Christ (§ 81).
The Lord is the Spirit (2 Cor. iii. 17).
a. This unique relation to believers in all lands and
in all ages necessarily carries with it yet larger
and more august attributes.
Who must He be who gathers within the folds of His
own personality the martyr Stephen, and all the rest
who since have fallen asleep, as well as James in Jeru¬
salem, Barnabas in Antioch, Apollos in Ephesus,
Paul in Rome, and every other Christian ? How
shall He be described who is felt and known by each
of these to be their Life ?
He is to us as God is to Him, and as the man is to
the woman ; the head of the woman is the man,
IN WHOM ALL THINGS CONSIST.
39
the head of every man is Christ, and the head
of Christ is God (i Cor. xi. 3 ; cf iii. 23).
He must stand, therefore, in a
b. Unique relation to God. He is the Son of God,
“ His own Son ” (Rom. viii. 3, 32), the Son of His
Love (Col. i. 13), the First-born (Rom. viii. 29 ;
Col. i. 15), declared by His resurrection to be
the Son of God according to the Spirit of holi¬
ness (Rom. i. 4). He is the Image of God
(2 Cor. iv. 4; Col. i. 15). God was in Him
(2 Cor. v. 19). He was God’s gift (Rom.
viii. 32 ; v. 8), God’s sending (Gal. iv. 4 ; Rom.
viii. 3). He is God’s agent in redeeming the
world {passim).
But this present and historical relation to God in¬
volves in Paul’s mind His pre-existence.
Jesus was originally in the form of God, and
counted it not a thing to be grasped at to be on
an equality with God, but emptied Himself,
taking the form of a servant, being made in the
likeness of man (Phil. ii. 6, 7).
In Him dwells all the fulness of the Godhead in
bodily form (Col. ii. 9).
Having reigned until all things are subject to Him,
the Son shall deliver up the Kingdom to the
Father, and be subjected to Him that God may
be all in all (1 Cor. xv. 24-28).
But the relation which is disclosed in the Christian
consciousness as existing between the Christ and the
Divine and human members of the Kingdom sets
Him in a
40
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
c. Unique relation to the universe.
The Kingdom of God is the goal of creation. But
the social organism of the Kingdom is found to be
the very Body of the Christ. How, then, must this
Unique Personality stand to the entire creation ?
Already in i Cor. viii. 6, Paul declares to us there is
one God, the Father, of whom are all things
and we unto Him, and one Lord, Jesus Christ,
through whom are all things and we through
Him.
The one God and the one Lord are here two distinct
transcendent persons; one the source, the other the
medium of creation.
He is the first-born of all creation : all things have
been created in Him, and through Him, and
unto Him ; and He is before all things, and in
Him all things consist (Col. i. 15-17, Key-Text).
He effects the creation, the continuance, the re¬
conciliation of the universe {ibid, and ver. 20).
He is the personal goal and consummation of the
universe (1 Cor. xv. 24/ ; Phil. ii. 10 f. ; Eph.
i. 9, 10).
Request: Eph. iii. 18, 19.
§ 89. The Law of the Spirit of Life.
The conduct of subjects of the Kingdom springs,
according to Paul, from the vital relation in
which they stand to the Christ {cf. § 80). It
is the way in which His life in them expresses
itself (Rom. viii. 9, 10). Hence
THE LA W OF THE SPIRIT OF LIFE. 41
Its Law is not of the Letter but of the Spirit
(2 Cor. iii. 6); is not an outer code, but an
inner Life ; is the Law of the Spirit of Life in
Christ Jesus (Rom. viii. 2 ; cf. The Law of the
Brotherhood, § 43).
Thus appears
The freedom for which we were called (Gal. v. 13)
with which Christ set us free (ver. 1), the spon¬
taneous conformity to the Spirit of the Christ
(2 Cor. iii. 17).
By comparing Paul’s three statements of what is
essential to the Christian life in Gal. vi. 155
v. 6 ; and 1 Cor. vii. 19,
we learn the genesis of the New Morality :
The “new creation” (2 Cor. v. 17) reveals itself as
“ faith working through love,” and so results in
“ the keeping of the commandments of God.”
The order of sequence is :
First, Faith ; second, Love ; third, Works:
grasp of the Vital Fact arouses the vital emotion
which impels to the vital activity.
This is the true psychological order, knowledge stirs
feeling which sets the will in motion. Only a gross
misunderstanding of Paul’s teaching could make out
of ** justification by faith a pretext for Solafidian
indifference to morality. Vital union with the
Christ, of which justification is God’s creative de¬
claration, involves a life-purpose which is at one
with the Christ’s, and which must show itself in the
corresponding conduct.
Christian morality is “ the Fruit of the Spirit ” (Gal.
v. 22 ).
Similarly, Paul describes as the abiding principles
42
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
of the New Life, Faith, Hope, Love (i Cor. xiii.
1 3 )*
This Trinity of Graces appears often in Paul’s
epistles, both early and late (i Thess. i. 3 ; v.
8 ; cf. 2 Thess. i. 3-5 ; Gal. v. 5, 6 ; 1 Cor.
xiii. ; Col. i. 4, 5).
Faith is the act of vital adhesion to the Christ
(Gal. ii. 20), continuous and progressive (2
Thess. i. 3; 1 Cor. xvi. 13; 2 Cor. x. 15;
Rom. xi. 20; Phil. i. 25; Col. i. 23; ii. 7.
See §§ 80, 81, 84).
It carries with it the filial spirit (Gal. iii. 26) of trust
in God (1 Thess. i. 8), in His Fatherly guid¬
ance (Rom. viii. 14) and control (Rom. viii.
28 ; Phil. iv. 6, 7), and expresses itself in con¬
stant prayer and thanksgiving (1 Thess. v.
1 7 , 18; Rom. xii. 12; Phil. iv. 6, 7; Col. iii.
17). Hence springs
Love toward God (rarely mentioned : 1 Cor. ii. 9 ;
viii. 3; Rom. viii. 28), but principally toward
man.
Paul repeats after Jesus that love is the universal
motive of Christian morality, cf. § 44.
Love is the fulfilment of the entire law (Gal. v.
14 ; Rom. xiii. 8-10) and a perpetual obligation
(Rom. xiii. 8 et passim ), as regards not only
fellow-members, but all men. Thus
In his first extant Epistle (1 Thessalonians), Paul
prays that his readers may “increase and
abound in love one toward another and toward
all men” (iii. 12), and bids them “follow after
that which is good, one toward another and
THE LA W OF THE SPIRIT OF LIFE. 43
toward all” (v. 15 ; cf. Gal. vi. 8-10). For love
constrains to
Mutual Service (Gal. v. 13), mutual burden-bearing
(Gal. vi. 2), mutual forbearance (Col. iii. 1 3 ; cf
Eph. iv. 2), mutual deference (Phil. ii. 3), mutual
edification (Rom. xv. 2 ; cf 1 Cor. viii. 1),
Love is the only spirit befitting the reciprocity of
service and life which makes up the social
organism (1 Cor. xii., xiii. ; cf Eph. iv. 16). It
is presumably
“ The Law of the Christ ” (Gal. vi. 2 ; cf. v. 13).
Hope is the vision of the eventual, the attitude of
the soul “ when feeling out of sight for the ends
of Being and ideal Grace.” It sights the un¬
seen goal (Rom. viii. 24).
It contemplates the certain consummation of
the Kingdom (salvation, 1 Thess. v. 8, 9 ;
righteousness, Gal. v. 5 ; the glory of God,
Rom. v. 2 ; the revealing of the Sons of God,
the redemption of our body, viii. 19-24). If
faith supplies the ground and love the motive ,
hope supplies the aim of action (viii. 25). It
gives a future to present conviction and
’emotion. Prospect is essential to purpose. It
is akin to that practical wisdom which discerns
what are the ends and means approved by the
Will of God (Col. i. 9). Hence it is the result
of testing or probation (Rom. v. 4 ; xii. 2). It
is the source of patience (1 Thess. i. 3 ; Rom.
viii. 25) and of triumph (Rom. v. 5).
The faith and hope and love which make the abid¬
ing life of the Kingdom (1 Cor. xiii.) are the
factors of which righteousness and peace and
44
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
joy in the Holy Spirit (Rom. xiv. 17) are the
product .
The greatest of these is Love (1 Cor. xiii. 13), the
bond of perfectness (Col. iii. 14).
The entire life of subjects of the Kingdom is to be
brought into obedience to this law of the Christ
(2 Cor. x. 5).
Let all that ye do be done in love (1 Cor. xvi. 14).
Whether ye eat or drink or whatsoever ye do, do all
to the glory of God (x. 31).
Whatsoever ye do, in word or in deed, do all in the
Name of the Lord Jesus, giving thanks to God
the Father through Him (Col. iii. 17).
The God of peace sanctify you wholly, and may
your spirit and soul and body be preserved
entire without blame at the coming of our Lord
Jesus Christ (1 Thess. v. 23).
The sins which the Kingdom must consequently ex¬
clude are enumerated (Gal. v. 19-21 ; 1 Cor. vi.
9, 10 ; Rom. i. 18-32 ; Col. iii. 5-9).
Rich clusters of Christian graces are described by
Paul in Gal. v. 22 ; 1 Cor. xiii.; Rom. xii. ;
Phil. ii. 1-25 ; Col. iii. 12-17.
Key-Text : Rom. v. 10.
Request : 1 Thess. v. 23.
§ 90. The Several Spheres.
About the way in which the Kingdom is realized in
the various cosmic and social spheres, Paul has
written much ; of which no exhaustive statement
THE SEVERAL SPHERES.
45
may be attempted in this Plan. What the
Christ has said is put together in §§ 58-63.
Here it is enough to mention under the several
headings there enumerated the corresponding
passages in Paul. Comparison with the writ¬
ings of the servant will help to make clearer the
sayings of the Master.
On (what moderns call) Nature, cf. § 59.
Rom. xi. 36 {cf Eph. iii. 9) ; 1 Cor. viii. 4-6 ;
Rom. i. 20, 25 ; 1 Cor. x. 26 ; Rom. xiv. 14 ;
Col. i. 15-17 ; 1 Cor. iii. 21-23 ; Rom. viii. 20-22,
38, 39 ; Phil. iii. 21.
On Man: his Body, cf. § 60.
1 Cor. xii. 18-26 {cf. Eph. v. 29) ; 1 Cor. vi.
13-20 ; ix. 27 j Rom. xii. 1 ; Phil. i. 20 ; 2 Cor.
xii. 3 ; 1 Thess. v. 23 / ; 1 Cor. xv. 35-53 ;
2 Cor. v. 1-4 ; Rom. viii. 11, 23 J Phil. iii. 21.
On Economic relations, cf. § 61.
Against covetousness, 1 Thess. ii. 5 ; 1 Cor.
v. 10 ; vi. 10 {cf. Eph. v. 5 ; 1 Tim. vi. 9, 10 ;
iii. 8 ; Tit. i. 7, n).
Dutiful discharge of daily calling, 1 Thess.
iv. 11 ; 2 Thess. iii. 8-12; 1 Cor. vii. 20
(cf Eph. iv. 28 ; 1 Tim. v. 8 ; Tit. iii. 8, 14).
Contentment, Phil. iv. 11, 12 (cf 1 Tim. iv. 8 ,
vi. 6, 8).
Masters and servants, 1 Cor. vii. 22 ; Philemon ;
Col. iii. 22-iv. 1 {cf. Eph. vi. 5-9 ; 1 Tim.
vi. 1, 2).
Giving, distribution, or communication to the
poor, Gal. ii. 10; 1 Cor. ix. 7 5 3 y
xvi. 1, 2 ; 2 Cor. viii. and ix. ; Rom. xii
8, 13 ; xv. 26 f. {cf. 1 Tim. vi. I 7 -I 9 )‘
46
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
On the Home, cf § 62.
Husband and wife, 1 Thess. iv. 4; 1 Cor.
v.; vii. ; ix. 5 ; xi. 2-15 ; xiv. 35 {cf. 2 Cor.
xi. 2) ; Rom. vii. 2, 3 ; Col. iii. 18/ {cf Eph.
v. 22-33);
parents and children, 1 Cor. vii. 14 ; 2 Cor.
xii. 14 ; Col. iii. 20, 21 {cf. Eph. vi. 1-4).
On the State, cf. § 63 ;
its Divine origin and sanction, Rom. xiii. 1-7 ;
xvi. 23 {cf 1 Tim. ii. 1-3 ; Tit. iii. 1).
its evanescence, 1 Cor. ii. 6, 8 ; vi. 1-7 ; xv . 24.
On the Church, cf § 76 ;
its nature in general, 1 Cor. xii.; Col. i. 18,
24 {cf Eph. i. 22/; iii. 10; iv. 1-16; v.
25-32 ; and 1 and 2 Tim.; Tit.) ;
its Officers, 1 Thess. v. 12/; Gal. vi. 6 ; 1 Cor.
iv. 1 ; xii. 28 ; xvi. 15/; 2 Cor. i. 24; x. 8;
xiii. 10; Rom. xvi. 1 ; Phil. i. 1 ; Col.
iv. 17 {cf Eph. iv. 11 ; and 1 and 2 Tim. ;
Tit.).
Baptism, Gal. iii. 27 ; 1 Cor. i. 14-17 ; xii. 13 ;
xv. 29 ; Rom. vi. 4 ; Col. ii. 12 {cf Eph!
iv - 5 );
the Lord’s Supper, 1 Cor. x. 16-21 ; xi. 20-34.
Worship, 1 Cor. xi. 1-19; xiv. ; Col. iii. 16;
{cf Eph. v. 19) ;
Gifts (charismata), 1 Cor. xii. ; Rom. xii. 6-8.
Divisions: how caused, 1 Cor. i. 11 f; iii. 1-7
21-23; how obviated (secret of reunion)!
Gal. ii. 7-10.
Discipline, 2 Thess. iii. 14 /; ; Gal. vi. 1 ; 1 Cor.
v. , vi. 5 ; 2 Cor. ii. 5-11 ; vii. 8-12.
Finance : support of poor, Gal. ii. 10 ; 1 Cor.
THE EPISTLE OF HOPE .
47
xvi. 1-4 ; 2 Cor. viii., ix. ; Rom. xii. 13 ;
xv. 25-28 ( cf. 1 Tim.);
support of ministry, 1 Thess. ii. 9 ; Gal.
vi. 6; 1 Cor. ix. ; 2 Cor. xi. 8, 9 ; Phil. iv.
14-18 ( cf. 1 and 2 Tim.).
Key-Text : Phil. iii. 21 b. The working whereby,
&c.
Request: Phil. i. 9-11.
B.— The Kingdom according to other New
Testament Writers.
§ 91. The Epistle of Hope.
First Peter seems to conceive of Christians as the
New Israel, delivered from bondage, but still on
their march through the wilderness to the pro¬
mised land.
They were going astray, but are now returned to the
Shepherd and Bishop of their souls (ii. 25).
They were redeemed from their vain hereditary
and traditional manner of life by the precious
blood of Christ (i. 18 ff.\ who carried up their
sins in His own Body unto the tree (ii. 24), and
suffered for sins once, the righteous for the un¬
righteous, that He might bring them to God
(iii. 18), that they, having died unto sins, might
live unto righteousness (ii. 24).
It is noteworthy that the description of the sufferings
of Christ in ii. is to a large extent taken from the
story of the suffering servant of Jehovah in Isa. liii.,
cf. § 18.
48
THE KINGDOM OF GOD,
God foreknew them, chose them (i. i, 2), called
them out of darkness into His marvellous light
(ii. 9), begat them again unto a living hope by
the resurrection of Jesus Christ (i. 3), through
the Word of God preached to them (i. 23 25).
They believe on Jesus and love Him (i. 7, 8), take
Him as their Example (ii. 21).
They are sprinkled with the blood of His (New
Covenant) sacrifice (i. 2 ; cf. Ex. xxiv. 8), and
so pledged to obedience (i. 2 ; cf Ex. xxiv. 7 ;
i. 14, 22 ; iii. 1 ; iv. 17).
They are thus an elect race, a royal priesthood,
a holy nation, a people for God’s own possession
(ii. 9, 10 ; cf Ex. xix. 5, 6).
They call on Him as Father (i. 17).
They are pilgrims and sojourners (i. 1 ; ii. 11), and
are to pass the time of their sojourning in fear
(i. 17), joy (i. 8; iv. 13, 15), holiness (i. 2, 15),
sobriety (i. 13 ; iv. 7 ; v. 8), patience (ii. 19, &c.),
humility (v. 5, 6), and zeal for that which is
good (iii. 13).
They form a brotherhood (ii. 17 ; v. 9), and are to
practise, “above all things,” unfeigned, hearty,
fervent love toward one another (i. 22 ; iv. 8).
They are stewards, spokesmen, agents of God
(iv. 10, 11).
For their behaviour in the Home, as husbands and
wives, see iii. 1-7 ; as servants, ii. 18-25 5 in the
State, ii. 13-17 ; and in the Church (iii. 21 ;
v. 1-5).
While thus on the march, they are by the power of
God guarded through faith unto a salvation
ready to be revealed in the last time (i. 5), —a
THE EPISTLE OF PRACTICAL WISDOM. 49
salvation towards which they are growing
(ii. 2), which they are even now receiving as the
end of their faith (i. 9). This appears at the
revelation of Jesus Christ (i. 7), the Chief Shep¬
herd (v. 4), and of His glory (iv. 13), at the end
of all things which is near (iv. 7).
Then will they enter the promised land,
The inheritance incorruptible, undefiled, and that
fadeth not away, now reserved for them in
Heaven (i. 4), the eternal glory of Godin Christ
into which they were called (v. 10).
This view of life involves
Hope as its key-note (i. 3, 13, 21 ; iii. 15), a con¬
tinual looking forward to the anticipated in¬
heritance (as above, i. 4, 5, 7, 9 ; ii. 2 ; iv. 7, 13 ;
v. 4, 10), ay, hope even for the spirits in prison
(iii. 19), to whom when dead the gospel was
preached (iv. 6).
Key-Text : i. 13.
Request : v. 10.
§ 92. The Epistle of Practical Wisdom.
Against a barren faith (James ii. 20; i. 22-24),
which consists with haughty censoriousness (i.
26; ii. 13 ; iii. 1-12 ; iv. 6-12 ; v. 9), truckling
to the rich (ii. 1-9), injustice to the poor {ibid.
v. 1-6), and general worldliness (iv. 1-4, 13-17),
James vindicates the ethical soundness of the King¬
dom.
God chose them that are poor as to the world to be
3 D
5 °
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
rich in faith and heirs of the Kingdom (or
crown of life, i. 12) promised to them that love
Him (ii. 5). Of His own will He brought them
forth by the word of truth (i. 18).
This inborn word, when received and obeyed,
is able to save their souls (i. 21).
They possess faith (i. 3), the faith of the Lord Jesus
Christ (ii. 1), but it is not a faith without works,
barren and dead (ii. 17, 20). It is a faith shown
by works (ii. 18), a faith that works with works
and is perfected by works (ii. 22).
They are justified, not only by faith (ii. 24), but by
works (ii. 21, 24, 25).
Works are the evidence of a living, saving faith ; and
the verdict of justification is according to the evidence-
This argument has no force against the faith of Paul
with its life-and-death surrender to the Christ: only
against the intellectualism which imagines that mere
knowledge of the word (i. 22) and assent to certain
theological propositions (ii. 19) is saving faith (cf
Rom. vii. 16, 22, where mental assent to the law
without conformity of life is the mark of the
“ wretched man ”). This intellectualism which puts
mental assent to propositions in place of life-sur¬
render to a Person is the common error of legal Tew
and philosophic Greek, of dogmatic Orthodoxy, and
of Rationalism. It is a “wisdom ” which breeds vain¬
glory, bitter jealousy, faction, confusion, and every
vile deed ; it is earthly, sensuous, devilish (James iii.
14-16). In contrast to this
Let him that is wise and understanding shew by his
good life his works in gentleness of wisdom
(iii. 13). For
THE EPISTLE OF PRACTICAL WISDOM. 51
The wisdom which God gives (i. 5) is pure, peace¬
able, “ sweetly reasonable,” open to persuasion,
full of kindness and good fruits, without doubt¬
fulness, without hypocrisy (iii. 17).
The wisdom which the Bible, as a whole, commends, is
not primarily speculative or intellectual ; it is practi¬
cal, ethical, religious to the core (see Proverbs).
The Law (of the Kingdom) is perfect, is the law of
liberty (i. 25 ; ii. 12), is the Royal Law, “Thou
shalt love thy neighbour as thyself” (ii. 8). It
excludes “respect of persons ” (ii. 1-9). Its sub¬
jects are “beloved brethren” (i. 2, 9, 16, 19 ; ii.
L 5, &c.).
Because the Law of Love, it enjoins Liberty, Equality,
Fraternity. It is the charter of the proletarian and
democrat.
Religious worship,* pure and undefiled, before our
God and Father consists, therefore, in looking
after widows and orphans in their trouble, and
in keeping oneself unstained from the world (i.
27). For friendship with the world is enmity
with God (iv. 4.)
Patience (i. 4, 12; v. 7-11), humility (iv. 6-10),
simple veracity (v. 12), and the prayer of faith
(v. 13-18), are also enjoined for the making up
of a character as perfect as the law : “ that ye
may be
Perfect and entire, lacking in nothing ” (i. 4).
The Kingdom of which they were heirs (ii. 5) is
* This, and not religion in general, is the meaning of the
Greek word threskeia.
52
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
with the coming of the Lord, the Judge, at
hand, at the door (v. 7, 8, 9).
Key-Text : iii. 17.
Request : i. 5-8.
§ 93. The Apology of the Transition.
“ A Kingdom which cannot be shaken ” is the Key
NOTE of Hebrews (xii. 28) which was written
(not by Paul) to convince sorely tried Jewish
Christians that the New Covenant (viii. 8, &c.),
mediated by Jesus is the perfect (x. 14-18) and
eternal (xiii. 20) consummation (xi. 40) of the
faulty (viii. 7, 8) and evanescent (ver. 13) Old
Covenant. This Kingdom is practically identical
with
The City which hath the foundations whose designer
and builder is God, for which Abraham looked
(xi. 10),
The better, the heavenly Fatherland which the be¬
lieving patriarchs sought after (xi. 14, 16),
The City which God prepared for them (xi. 16),
Mount Zion, the city of the living God, the heavenly
Jerusalem, the general assembly and Church of
the first-born who are enrolled in Heaven (xii.
22 ff .); to which Christians are already come ;
as they are already “receiving” the Kingdom
unshakable (xii. 28).
The Christ is the Son of God, the very Image of
His substance, Creator, Upholder, Heir of all
things (i. 1-3) ; and therefore superior to the
angels (i. 4-ii. 5), to Moses (iii.-iv. 13), to the
THE APOLOGY OF THE TRANSITION. 53
(Aaronic) High Priest (v., vi., vii.), and to the
ancient sacrifices (ix., x.). He is the author and
perfecter of faith (xii. 2). Himself at once High
Priest and victim, He offered Himself through
the Eternal Spirit unto God (ix. 14;, tasted
death for every man (ii. 9), and having put away
sin by the sacrifice of Himself (ix. 26), entered
into Heaven (ix. 24), sitting down at the right
hand of the Majesty on high (i. 3).
For this cause He is the mediator of the New
Covenant of which the prophet Jeremiah spake
(xxxi. 31-34)—the New Covenant of forgiveness
and the law within (ix. 15; viii. 8 ff ,; see § 15).
His blood cleanses our conscience from dead
works (ix. 14); our hearts are sprinkled from
an evil conscience (x. 22).
By this offering those whose life is based on repent¬
ance from dead works and faith toward God
(vi. 1), and who obey Christ (v. 9), are ‘''sancti¬
fied ” (x. 10) or “ perfected ” (x. 14 ; ritual figures
equivalent to Paul’s forensic “ justified ”). They
are enlightened (vi. 4), have received the know¬
ledge of the truth (x. 26), have tasted of the
heavenly gift and of the powers of the age to
come, are partakers of the Holy Spirit (vi. 4,
5), and have become partakers of the Christ
(iii. 14). He calls them brethren (ii. 11).
Unshaken constancy (ii. 1, &c.), unwavering con¬
fession (iv. 14), persistent (x. 36; xii. 1) pro¬
gress (vi. 1) towards the practised insight
(v. 14) and ethical completeness (xii. 14; xiii. 21)
ot Christian maturity (v. 1 i-vi. 3) are specially
required.
54
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
In a very little while (x. 25, 37), the Christ who is
now in the Heavenly sanctuary (ix. 12) shall
appear a second time to them that wait for Him
unto Salvation (ix. 28).
Then they will enter (iv. 3) the Kingdom now ap¬
proached and possessed only by faith (xi.), the
world to come (ii. 5), the eternal inheritance
(ix. 15), the Sabbath-rest which remains for the
people of God (iv. 9), the City which is to come
(xiii. 14).
Request : xiii. 20, 21.
§ 94. Vision of the Kingdom triumphant.
The Apocalypse of John is a Christian counterpart
to the Apocalypse of Daniel (§ 26). The drama
it unfolds is the conflict between the Kingdom
of God and the Kingdom of the World (§ 7).
When the curtain rises both Kingdoms are in
actual existence on the earth. Of Jesus the
Christ it is said
He made us to be a Kingdom unto His God and
Father (i. 6 ; so ver. 9); and
Thou madest men of every tribe and tongue and
people and nation to be unto our God a King¬
dom (v. 10).
He is the faithful witness, the first-born of the dead,
the ruler of the Kings of the earth (i. 5), the
first and the last, the Living One, once dead,
alive for evermore (i. 17 f ), the beginning of
the creation of God (iii. 14), the Lamb in the
midst of the Throne (vii. 17), the Lamb slain
VISION OF THE KINGDOM TRIUMPHANT. 55
from the foundation of the world (xiii. 8), the
King of Kings and Lord of Lords (xvii. 14;
xix. 16), the Word (Logos) of God (xix. 13).
Subjects are loved by Jesus, loosed from their sins
by His blood (i. 5), purchased unto God by His
blood (v. 9), made priests unto God (i. 6 ; v. 10)
and His Christ (xx. 6), conquerors (ii. 7, &c.),
written in the Lamb’s book of life (xiii. 8) from
the foundation of the world (xvii. 8), bidden to
the marriage supper of the Lamb (xix. 9),
destined to reign for ever (xxii. 5).
To rede the riddle of the Book an attempt has been
thus made :—
The Kingdom of the world (xi. 15) has been given
to the Beast (xvii. 17), which is the Roman
Empire. The Harlot is the great city (of
Rome) which has the Kingdom over the Kings
of the earth (xvii. 18). The seven heads are
the seven hills on which the city sits (xvii. 9),
and are the seven emperors : of whom five have
passed (xvii. 10), Augustus, Tiberius, Caligula,
Claudius, Nero ; one is, Galba (xvii. 10) ; one
is not yet come.
According to this explanation, the Apocalypse must
have been written in 68 or 69 a.d. during the reign
of Galba.
Then Nero, one of the seven which was and is
not, is to be the eighth (he was expected to
return to life). He was the Evil World-Power
_the Roman Empire—personified ; par ex¬
cellence, the Beast; Caesar Nero, spelled in
Hebrew characters, makes up the number 666
56 _ THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
(xiii. 18). The “other beast” with two lamb’s
horns (xiii. 11 ff\ which seems to be identical
with “the false prophet” {cf. xiii. 13; xvi. 13;
xix. 20), is said to be Paganism as a religion
which deified the Emperor.
By the Beast and the ten Kings as yet without king¬
dom (xvii. 12) may be meant Nero and the
Parthians, who were expected to come and
destroy Rome (ver. 16, 17).
The Christ, the Faithful and True, the Word of
God (xix. 11-14), sprinkled with blood (ver. 13),
followed by the armies of heaven on white
hoises and in white linen (symbol of purity or
“righteous acts,” ver. 8, 14), slew the forces of
the Beast with the sword that came out of His
mouth (ver. 21), and caused Beast and prophet
to be cast into the lake of fire (ver. 20).
The world, that is, is to be conquered by the word
of the Crucified and the holy conduct of His followers.
The Key-Text of the book is
The Kingdom of the world has become the King¬
dom of our Lord and of His Christ (xi. 15).
Then presumably comes the first resurrection
(xx. ifF.y
Then the reign of a thousand years (xx. 4-6).
Then Satan, Gog, and Magog assemble and are
defeated (xx. 7-10).
Then the Last Judgment (xx. 11).
Then the New Heaven and the New Earth
(xxi., xxii.), in which there are still nations
and kings of the earth (xxi. 24, 26); and the
THE EPISTLE OF LOVE.
57
healing of the nations (xxii. 2) is still provided
for.
The Holy City, the New Jerusalem, descends out of
heaven from God (xxi. 2, 10, &c.).
Request : xxii. 20.
§ 95. The Epistle of Love.
The Kingdom is not once mentioned in First John ,
but what elsewhere is called Kingdom here ap¬
pears in contrast to “The World” as
Life, i. 2 ; Eternal Life,
v. 11. to Death, iii. 14, 15.
Light, ii. 8, 10 „ Darkness, i. 6; ii. 9, 11.
Truth, iii. 19 ; cf. i. 8 ; ii. 4 ,, Lie, Error, ii. 21; iv. 6.
Love, iv. 16, &c. ,, Hatred, passim.
Children of God, iii. 10 ,, Children of the Devil, iii. 10.
In Him, passim ,, In the Evil One, v. 19.
Abiding for ever, ii. 17 ,, Passing away, ii. 17.
The subjects of the Kingdom are of God (iv. 4, 6),
begotten of God (iii. 9), now children of God
(iii. 1) ; they believe that Jesus is the Christ (v.
1), confess that Jesus is the Son of God (iv. 15) ;
they have the Father (ii. 23); they have the
Son and have in Him eternal life from God (v.
They have fellowship with the Father and with the
Son (i. 3), and with one another (i. 7. This is
almost explicitly the Synoptic idea of the King¬
dom, § 74).
They are in Him (ii. 5): abide in Him (ii. 27), abide
in the Son and in the Father (ii. 24), live through
58
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
the Son (iv. 9. This agrees with Paul’s idea of
our being “in Christ Jesus,” § 80).
They have received from the Holy One an Anoint¬
ing which abides in them, is true and teaches
them concerning all things (ii. 20, 27). God
gave them His Spirit (iii. 24 ; iv. 13).
They by their faith overcome the world (v. 4) and
the Evil One (ii. 13), and are kept by the Son
from the Evil One (v. 18 ).
Their sins are confessed and forgiven (i. 9; ii. 12).
The blood of Jesus, whom God sent to be a
propitiation for our sins and for the sins of the
whole world (ii. 2 ; iv. 10) cleanses them from
all sin (i. 7). They sin not (do not keep on
sinning : present imperfect, iii. 6, 9).
They are righteous as He is (iii. 7). They are in the
world as He is (iv. 17); they walk as He
walked (ii. 6), keep His commandments (word,
ii- 3 ? 5 )» Purify themselves as He is pure (iii. 3),
receive of Him what they ask (iii. 22 ; v. 14).
They are, above all else, bidden to love one
ANOTHER (ii. 10; iii. II, 14, 18,23; iv. 7, 11,
12, 16, 21 ; v. 1) with a sincere and practical
intensity (iii. 18), which will give up worldly
goods (iii. 17) and life itself for the brethren
(iii. 16). Obviously they are prompt to pray for
sinning brethren (v. 16).
The reasons adduced for this great commandment
bring us to the very heart of the Evangelic idea of the
Kingdom.
God is Love (iv. 8 , 16 ). He is the source of all
love : we love because He first loved us (iv. 19).
Herein is love that He loved us and sent His
THE EPISTLE OF LOVE.
59
Son to be the propitiation of our sins (iv. io).
In this act His love became manifest (iv. 9).
Hereby know we love, because He laid down His
life for us (iii. 16).
The Father’s sending of the Son to save the world
(iv. 14), and the Son’s laying down His life for
us (iii. 16), has shown us what love is (iii. 16),
what manner of love is bestowed by the Father
(iii. 1), and that, according to this standard of
love, God is love (iv. 8, 16).
Therefore we must love one another (iv. 11). To
love is to be begotten of God and to know God
(iv. 7). If we love one another God abides in
us and His love is perfected in us. He that
abides in love abides in God and God abides in
him.
The Kingdom thus appears as essentially the Fellowship
of love. Root, stem, branch, leaf, flower, fruit—all
are Love, Life-bestowing, Life-pervading, Life-eter¬
nizing Love.
This fellowship is meant to embrace the entire
world. The Son was manifested to destroy the
works of the Devil, sin, lawlessness, hatred (iii.
8-12). The lust of the flesh, the lust of the
eyes, and the pretentiousness of life—all that is
in the (evil) world—are passing away (ii. 16,
17). But the Father hath sent the Son to be
the Saviour of the world (iv. 14).
The darkness is passing away and the true light
already shineth (ii. 8).
The Coming of the Christ, His future manifestation
(ii. 28; iii. 2), the day of judgment (iv. 17), is
6o
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
looked forward to with boldness (ii. 28 ; iv. 17)
and hope (iii. 3); for then we shall be like Him
since we shall see Him even as He is (iii. 2).
Key-Text : iv. 16A
Request: 2John 3.
§ 96. The last Memoirs of the Christ.
“The Gospel according to John” is the latest
biography of Jesus which Scripture contains.
It reports His sayings and doings in the light
of nearly two generations of Christian experi¬
ence. The new elements bring out the vital
unity of the Kingdom.
The Kingdom of God everywhere present in the
Synoptics occurs here only twice.
Except a man be born from above, he cannot
see the Kingdom of God (iii. 3).
Except a man be born of water and the spirit,
he cannot enter into the Kingdom of God
(iii. 5).
Entrance is a vital creative process. The Divine
causality in the Christian life is much emphasised in
John (v. 21, 25 ; xvii. 2). At His trial Jesus says :
“My Kingdom is not of this world,” else “would
my servants fight ” ; “ but now is My Kingdom
not from hence ” (xviii. 36).
As every one that enters is born from above, so is
the Kingdom itself. It is not worldly in origin nor
THE LAST MEMOIRS OF THE CHRIST. 61
in nature ; it does not rely on brute force for main¬
tenance or extension. Jesus adds :
“ I am a King ” : bom and come into the world to
witness to the truth. Every one that is of the
truth heareth My voice (ver. 37).
He is King in
The Kingdom of the Truth : of moral and spiritual
authority therefore, not of physical coercion.
Truth in John denotes truth of the practical reason,
rather than of the speculative reason : the rightness
of conduct as well as of conviction :
that which is stedfast and trustworthy in character
not less than in thought. “ To do the truth ” has as
contrast “to do ill” (iii. 21). “The truth” makes
free from the bondage of sin (viii. 32-34). Hence
“truth” in John in some measure corresponds to
“ righteousness ” in Paul.
The favourite image for truth so conceived is
light : it is “ the light of life ” (viii. 12). Jesu’s is
the Kingdom of Light : His subjects are “ sons
of light ” (xii. 36).
But the identification of the Kingdom with the Christ
which we saw proceeding in Paul (§ 80) goes beyond
saying that His Kingdom is of the truth, or that Ilis
subjects are “ the light of the world ” (Matt. v. 14).
Jesus says :
“ I am the Truth” (xiv. 6). “ I am the Light of the
world” (viii. 12 ; ix. 5). Hence “follow Me” is
(as in the Synoptics) the supreme duty (from
first, i. 43, to last, xxi. 22 ; so viii. 12 ; x. 4, 27 ;
xii. 26).
62
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
The image of the King and the Kingdom reappears
in the closely kindred idea of
The Good Shepherd and His Sheep (x. 10-30).
Note the deepening vital relation : “ I am the
good shepherd.” “ I came that they may have
life, and may have it abundantly.” “ I lay down
my life for the sheep, . . . that I may take it
again.” “ I give unto them eternal life.” There
may be different folds, but they shall become
“ One flock, one shepherd.”
In the Synoptics the Kingdom was set forth as
equivalent to Life {cf Mark ix. 43, 45, 47), nay to
eternal life ( cf. Mark x. 17, and 23, 25, 30). In
John the latter idea is chiefly prominent.
Eternal Life is already possessed by those who
believe (v. 24 ; vi. 40, 47). It consists in know¬
ing the only true God and Jesus Christ (xvii. 3),
—with the living spiritual and ethical know¬
ledge which “the truth” in John implies. To
believe on the Son, to know Him, is an act
of vital appropriation : “ Only he that eateth
My flesh and drinketh My blood hath eternal
life ” (vi. 54).
“ I am the bread of life,” which giveth life unto
the world (vi. 33, 35 )-
“ The bread which I shall give is my flesh, for
the life of the world” (vi. 51).
“ He that eateth my flesh and drinketh my
blood abideth in me and I in him ” (vi. 56).
cf. Transcorporation, § 84. Paul’s experience of the
believer being “in Christ Jesus” here appears on
THE LAST MEMOIRS OF THE CHRIST. 63
the lips of Jesus Himself. So does the root-thought
of Paul that “ Christ is our life ” (§ 8o). Jesus
says :
“ I am the life ” (xi. 25 ; xiv. 6). Believers are
made alive by Him (v. 21, 25), and live because
of Him (vi. 57 ; xiv. 19).
The relation between the One Life and the many
lives is set forth under the figure, not as in Paul of
the human body, but of the Vine.
“ I am the Vine : ye are the Branches ” (xv. 5). Not
“ I am the Root or the Stem ” ; but “ The
Vine,” which includes every branch and leaf
and tendril. Hence, “ Abide in Me and I in
you ” (xv. 4 ; xiv. 20, &c.).
This vital relation introduces us to a Unity more
intense, complex, transcendent.
The Spirit of truth, of Whom the subjects are born
(iii. 5, 8), is in them and abides with them for
ever (xiv. 17). He guides them into all the
truth, even knowledge of things to come(xvi. 13).
He takes of what is Christ’s, and declares it unto
them (ver. 14 /.) Jesus adds, All things that
the Father hath are Mine (xvi. 15 ; xvii. 10).
“ If a man love Me, . . . My Father will love
him, and We will come unto him and make Our
abode with him ” (xiv. 23).
This is a reciprocity of knowledge :—
u I know Mine own and Mine own know Me, even
as the Father knoweth Me and I know the
Father ” (x. 14 /.).
64 THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
It is a reciprocity of life :—
“ As the living Father sent Me, and I live because
of the Father ; so he that eateth Me shall live
because of Me (vi. 57).
It eventually becomes one with the Unity in¬
effable :—
“ I and the Father are One” (x. 30). He that hath
seen Me hath seen the Father (xiv. 9). “ I
pray for them that believe on Me that they may
all be one ; even as Thou, Father, art in Me
and I in Thee, that they also may be in Us.
And the glory which thou hast given Mel have
given unto them ; that they may be one, even
as We are One : I in them, and Thou in Me,
that they may be perfected into One (xvii.
20-23).
Of this profound Unity, in its earlier as in its
eventual state,
Love is the ethical expression or law (xvii. 24, 26 ;
xiv. 21 ; xv. 9, 13 ; xvi. 27 ; xv. 12, 17). As
governing the mutual relation of the subjects,
it is proclaimed the
New Commandment (xiii. 34).
The Kingdom, so conceived, is intended to include
the whole of mankind.
I, if I be lifted up from the earth will draw all men
unto Me (xii. 32).
The perfected unity of all that believe with the
Father and the Son is designed in order that
the world too may believe (xvii. 21, 23).
PlNALE.
65
So far we have kept to the sayings of Jesus reported
in John, and mainly to such as are distinct from
the sayings in the Synoptics.
The fourth Evangelist himself adds a most im¬
portant idea.
The consentient and ever clearer verdict of the ex¬
perience of believers during the first two Chris¬
tian generations has assigned to the Christ a
position in the Kingdom transcendently unique.
Vitally one with the Father and vitally one with
each of the brethren, He must be uniquely re¬
lated also to human beings before they enter
the Kingdom, and to the entire creation of
which the Kingdom is the destined goal. This
imperative inference has appeared in other
writings, especially in the later Pauline letters.
But in the prologue to John, it reaches its
highest Biblical expression. The evangelist
finds the ultimate explanation of the facts of
Christian experience in the idea of the Logos
(Reason in thought and expression) who is the
only begotten Son (or God) in the bosom of the
Father : Himself God, Creator, Light of every
man, who became flesh and tabernacled among
us full of grace and truth (i. 1-18).
Key-Text and Request in one : xvii. 22^, 23.
§ 97. Finale.
A general review of the course of study now completed
might now be given by the Teacher,
hew things could be rendered more fascinating than
3 E
66
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
a rapid glance over the progress of the Kingdom,
from its beginnings under Moses, and its typical reali
zation in the half-barbarous realm of David, on to
the goal when all are enfolded in the unity of eternal
love and life—in the Christ and the Father.
Or the task of review might be distributed among, say, four
members of the Class and the Teacher. Let one of
the four devote a quarter of an hour to a picturesque
summary of the progress in §§ 1-20 (to end of Exile);
let another in equal time review §§ 21-30 : let a third
similarly reproduce §§ 31-74 5 the fourth §§ 75*96;
and let the Teacher conclude with a vivid survey of
the entire course.
APPENDIX. I.
How Later Thinkers put it.
The following series of descriptions of the King¬
dom by eminent thinkers, past and present, may be
found helpful in many ways. It is not meant to be
a complete rosary of historical definitions, nor has
it been compiled with a view to “proportionate
representation” of the various epochs of Christian
theology. Its chief value lies in leading the learner
to test the ideas he has been forming of the King¬
dom by a comparison with the conclusions of widely
diverse religious teachers.
The statements of Augustine, who brought to the
fore in ancient theology the idea of the Divine
Commonwealth, and of Kant, who restored it in a
purer form to modern theology, have accordingly
been given at some length.
Augustine’s great work De Civitate Dei (ended
A.D. 426), is, he says, a description of “ the city of
God and the city of the World their origin, pro¬
gress, and destiny. “ These two cities are entangled
together in this world and intermixed until the last
judgement effect their separation.”
“ This heavenly City, while it sojourns on earth,
calls citizens out of all nations, and gathers together
a society of pilgrims of all languages, not scrupling
about diversities in the manners, laws, and institu¬
tions whereby earthly peace is secured and main-
68
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
tained, but recognising that however various these
are, they all tend to one and the same end of earthly
peace. It is therefore so far from rescinding or
abolishing these diversities that it preserves and
adopts them, so long as no hindrance to the wor¬
ship of the Supreme and Only God is thus induced.”
“ The two cities have been formed by two loves—
the earthly by the love of self, even to the contempt
of God; the heavenly by the love of God, even to
the contempt of self. The former glories in itself,
the latter in the Lord. For the one seeks glory from
men ; but the greatest glory of the other is God, the
Witness of Conscience. ... In the one the princes
and the nations it subdues are ruled by the love of
ruling; in the other the princes and the subjects
serve one another in love—the latter obeying, while
the former take thought for all. The one delights
in its own strength, represented in the persons of its
rulers ; the other says to its God, ‘ I will love Thee,
O Lord, my Strength’ (Ps. xviii. i). And therefore
the wise men of the one city, living according to
man, have sought for profit to their own bodies or
souls, or both, and those who have known God
1 glorified Him not as God’ (Rom. i. 21-25). . . .
They were either leaders or followers of the people
in adoring images. . . . But in the other city there
is no human wisdom, but only godliness, which
offers due worship to the true God, and looks for
its reward in the society of the saints, of holy angels
as well as holy men, ‘ that God may be all in all.’ ”
“ The peace of the heavenly City is the perfectly
ordered and harmonious enjoyment of God, and of
one another in God.”
HOW LATER THINKERS PUT 77 . 69
“ The Church is even now the Kingdom of Christ,
the Kingdom of Heaven ” Augustine also speaks
“ of Christ and the Church, that is, of the King and
that City which He founded. 5 ’
Observe that Civitas here translated “ city” has a much
larger meaning than our English “city,” including also
what is meant by “ the State,” and so comes near to our
“ Kingdom.”
Wiclif (died 1384): “The Kingdom of Christ,
whether it be understood as the aggregate of
creatures, or as the aggregate of the elect,” in¬
creases continually but not endlessly ; for when the
number of spirits needed to make up the complete
City of God or of the devil have been created, the
consummation of this world is reached. By the
Church Wiclif understands “ the congregation of
all the elect.”
Melanchthon (died 1560): “ The Kingdom of
Christ is this : that the Son of God establishes and
maintains a ministry of the Gospel, gathers a Church,
and is truly effectual in them that believe ; quickens
them with the voice of the Gospel, and sanctifies by
the Holy Spirit to eternal life ; defends them against
the tyranny of devils and instruments of devils, and
thereafter raises up the saints to eternal life, and
delivers up the Kingdom to the Father, that is,
brings the eternal Church into the presence of the
eternal Father, that the Divinity may thereafter reign
in them openly, not by the ministry of the Gospel.
For so long as hitherto the Church has been gathered
by the ministry of the Gospel, this is called the
Kingdom of Christ in this life, , . . and yet the
70
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Kingdom of the Son is eternal because throughout
eternity, along with the Father and the Holy Spirit,
He reigns and abides Head of the Church.”
“ The visible Church is the visible company of
men holding the teaching of the Gospel uncor¬
rupted and rightly using the Sacraments, in which
company the Son of God is operative through the
ministry of the Gospel, and regenerates many to
eternal life, although there are in that company
also many others who are not saints, but yet agree
in doctrine and outward profession.”
Calvin (died 1564): “The Kingdom of God
among men is nothing else than a restoration to the
blessed life; or, in other words, it is true and ever¬
lasting happiness.” “The most important part of
God’s Kingdom lies in His Will being done.”
Again he defines the Kingdom as “ the newness of
life by which God restores us to the hope of a
blessed immortality,” as “the inner and spiritual
renewal of the soul ” which will issue in “ the entire
recovery of ourselves and of the whole world,” as
“the spiritual life which is begun by faith in this
world, and grows increasingly every day according
to the persistent progress of faith.” “The begin¬
ning of this Kingdom is regeneration, the end and
completion is a blessed immortality; the interven¬
ing progress lies in the ampler advance and increase
of regeneration.” “ The perfection of the Kingdom
of God ” is “ fellowship in the Divine Glory.” “ Thy
Kingdom come ” is a prayer “ that God would with
the light of His Word irradiate the world ; that He
would with the breath of His Spirit mould men’s
hearts into conformity with His righteousness \ that
HOW LATER THINKERS PUT IT. 71
He would restore to order, under His auspices,
whatever,had been scattered in the earth. But He
makes a commencement of His reign by subjugating
the lusts of our flesh. 53
The Westminster Confession (1648): “The
visible Church, which is also catholic and universal
under the Gospel (not confined to one nation as
under the Law), consists of all those throughout the
world that profess the true religion, together with.
their children ; and is the Kingdom of the Lord
Jesus Christ, the family of God, out of which there
is no ordinary possibility of salvation. 55
Kant (died 1804): “Rational beings stand all
under the law that every one of them shall treat
himself and all others never merely as means but
always as ends in themselves. [This is substantially
Kant’s second form of the Categorical Imperative of
the Moral Law.] “ But in this way originates a
systematic association of rational beings by means
of common objective laws, z’.£., a Kingdom, which
because these laws have as their object the relation
of these beings to one another as means and ends,
can be called a Kingdom of Ends . 35 [“Act as
members of such a Kingdom 53 is practically Kant’s
third form of the Categorical Imperative.]
“We must conceive 33 the Primal Cause of creation
“ as not merely Intelligence and Lawgiver to Nature
but also as lawgiving Sovereign in a moral Kingdom
of Ends. 33
“ Christian Ethics 33 thus combines the two “ in¬
dispensable constituents of the Highest Good 33 —
morality and happiness, or holiness and bliss ; it
“represents the world in which rational beings
7 2
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
devote themselves with all their heart to the moral
law as a Kingdom of God in which Nature and
Morals come into a harmony ... by means of a
Holy Creator, who makes possible the (from Him)
derived Highest Good.”
“The supremacy of the Good Principle ... is
. . . only attainable by the erection and extension
of a Society in pursuance and furtherance of the
laws of virtue, and to bring the entire human race
within the compass of this Society is laid down by
the Reason as appointed task and duty.” “A
union of men under laws of Virtue simply . . . may
be called an ethical community.” “An ethical com¬
munity can only be conceived as a people under
Divine commands, z.e., as a people of God.” “ Such
a community, as a Kingdom of God, can be under¬
taken by men only through religion.”
“The idea of a people of God is (under human
management) to be developed in no other way than
in the form of a Church.”
“The Invisible Church is the union of all the
righteous under the Divine immediate but moral
government of the world.”
“ The Visible Church is the actual union of men
in a whole which accords with that ideal.” “ The
true (visible) Church is that which represents the
(moral) Kingdom of God on earth so far as it come
to pass through men.”
Schleiermacher (died 1834): “Whatever in Chris¬
tianity becomes consciousness of God is also related
to the sum total of actions in the idea of a Kingdom
of God. . . That figure of a Kingdom of God,
which in Christianity is so important, which even
HOW LATER THINKERS PUT IT. 73
includes in itself everything, is only the general
expression of the truth that in Christianity all pain
and all joy are pious only in so far as they are
related to action in the Kingdom of God, and that
every pious emotion which proceeds from a passive
state ends in the consciousness of a transition to
action.”
Olshausen (died 1839): “The Kingdom of God is
the community of life which Christ has brought in
and founded, conceived in the widest sense both as
outward and inward.”
Rothe (died 1867): “On the basis of an idea
already built and developed through the whole
economy of the Old Testament, Christianity de¬
scribes the Highest Good as the Kingdom of God,
which it represents as successively realizing itself
under the concrete determinateness of the Kingdom
of Christ, i.e., of the Redeemer.” “ Moral Good is
essentially at the same time religious Good. . . .
Considered in its completion, it is the absolute com¬
munity, i.e., the actual unity of man, i.e., of
humanity, with God, and, by means of this
unity, the absolute appropriation of the entire
earthly creation to God,—the absolute Rule of
God, His absolute Kingdom on earth. This is
the highest religious Good.” The moral com¬
munity develops through the stages of the Family,
the Tribe, Peoples and States, and the Church,
into “ the universal Organism of States,” which
“ must be conceived as at the same time the King¬
dom of God in its uttermost completeness, as the
absolute Theocracy or Rule of God.”
F. D. Maurice (died 1872) translates Jesus’
74 THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
words, Yours is the Kingdom of Heaven,” thus :—
You have a Father in Heaven who is seeking after
you, watching over you, whom you may trust
entirely. He ruled over your forefathers. He
promised that He would show forth His Dominion
fully and perfectly in the generations to come. I
am come to tell you of Him : to tell you how He
rules over you, and how you may be in very deed
His subjects. I am come that you and your child¬
ren may be citizens in God’s own city : that the
Lord God Himself may reign over you.”
Strauss (died 1874) says that by the Kingdom of
God Jesus meant “that spiritual and moral eleva¬
tion, that new and no longer servile but child-like
relation to God ” in which men “ would find a
happiness which, besides being at once desirable in
itself, should at the same time include in itself the
natural germs of all outward improvement ” (Matt.
vi - 33 )-
Tholuck (died 1877): The Kingdom of God is
an organized community which has the principle
of its life in the will of the personal God.”
Keim (died 1878): The religious universe of
Jesus may be thus described : “The Fatherhood of
God for men ; the Sonship of man for God ; and
the eternal spiritual possession of the Kingdom of
Heaven will be this Fatherhood and Sonship.” “ The
Kingdom of God is intrinsically righteousness.”
Van Oosterzee (died 1882;.- “The Kingdom
. . . is a religious moral institution which, bound¬
less in extent and everlasting in duration, in its
design to unite, sanctify, and save humanity, em¬
braces heaven and earth.”
how later thinkers put it. 75
Dorner (died 1884): “The Highest Good, which
exists originally in the Triune God revealed in
Christ and derivatively in the individual personality,
reaches full development as a power in the world in
the various moral communities which are organic¬
ally connected with each other in the same way as
the Divine attributes of which they are copies. The
unity or total organism formed by these communi¬
ties is the Kingdom of God (Civitas Dei).” One of
these—the “Absolute or Religious”—is the Church,
which he describes as “ certainly a narrower idea
than that of the Kingdom of God.” “ The Church
is the animating, hallowing, glorifying centre of all
moral communities.” “ The Church is the innermost
power of consummation to all spheres through the
eternal life having its seat in it.”
Dorner more briefly speaks of the Kingdom of
God as “ an organized life of love in the world.”
Martensen (died 1884): “The universal concept
of the Kingdom of God which comes through his¬
tory, is the concept of a community and an invisible
order of things,—a total organization of created
personalities, of powers, influences, and gifts, in
which God reigns and rules, not merely by His
power, but also by His world-redeeming and soul-
redeeming love and mercy, in which, whilst ransom¬
ing His creatures, He makes them partakers not
merely in His holiness, but also in the fulness of
His love.”
Matthew Arnold (died 1888): “The Kingdom
of God is the reign of righteousness, God’s will done
by all mankind.”
Ritschl (died 1889) defines the Kingdom of God
76
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
as “ the reciprocal relation between God and men
which, in the Christian religion, is the Highest
Good and, at the same time, the appointed task of
life ” : again, as “ the organization of humanity by
means of conduct prompted by love.” “ The com¬
munity of believers as subject of the worship of God
and of the juristic institutions and organs which
minister to that worship, is Church : as subject
of the reciprocal action of its members [springing]
from the motive of love, it is Kingdom of God.”
Renan (died 1892): The Kingdom of God “ap¬
pears to have been understood by Jesus in very
different senses. At times He might be taken for
a democratic leader desiring only the reign of the
poor and the disinherited. At other times the King¬
dom of God is the literal accomplishment of the
apocalyptic visions of Daniel and Enoch. Finally,
the Kingdom of God is often a spiritual Kingdom,
and the near deliverance is a deliverance of the
spirit. ... All these thoughts seemed to have co¬
existed in the mind of Jesus.” “ It was . . . pro¬
bably above all, the Kingdom of the soul founded
on liberty and on the filial sentiment which the
virtuous man feels when resting on the bosom of his
Father” “Even in our own days. . . . the dreams
of an ideal organization of society ... are only,
in one sense, the blossoming of the same idea
of which the Kingdom of God will be eternally the
root and stem. All the social revolutions of human¬
ity will be grafted on that phrase.”
A. B. Bruce speaks of the Kingdom of God as
from the first expected to be “ a holy State in which
HOW LATER THINKERS PUT IT. 77
ideally perfect relations between God and man
should be realized,” and as by Jesus further defined
to possess the distinctive marks of “spirituality,”
“universality,” and “grace.” This Kingdom He
declared to be “a chief end for God as well as for
man.”
“ The Kingdom of God, in one view of it, is an
ideal hovering in heavenly purity above all earthly
realities, and not to be sought or found in any exist¬
ing society, civil or ecclesiastical. It is an inspira¬
tion rather than an institution. . . . But all ideals
crave embodiment.” And the Church of which Jesus
spoke to Peter He meant to be “practically identi¬
cal with the Kingdom of God He had hitherto
preached.”
A. M. Fairbairn: “What [Jesus] founded was a
society to realize His own ideal—a Kingdom of
Heaven, spiritual, internal, which came without
observation ; a realm where the Will of God is law,
and the law is love, and the citizens are the loving
and the obedient, whose type is the reverent and
tender and trustful child.”
“ The Kingdom is the Church viewed from above ;
the Church is the Kingdom seen from below.”
“The Kingdom is the immanent Church, and the
Church is the explicated Kingdom. The Kingdom
is the Church expressed in the terms and mind and
person of its Founder; the Church is the King¬
dom done into living souls and the society they
constitute.”
Newman Smyth: “The Kingdom of Heaven
among men is a temper of mind, a spiritual dis¬
position, a state of heart.” “The Kingdom is to
78
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
be built of persons having Christ-like characters.”
“ It is a kingdom or society of men.”
Stuckenberg : “ The Kingdom which Jesus came
to establish is a perfect union of believers. God is
the Founder of this Kingdom, and it is a real theo-
ciacy. Jesus is the King, andTIis followers are the
subjects. God’s will is the law of the realm. Love
is the controlling spirit of the citizens. Life and
death are the reward and punishment in this Divine
State.”
Tolstoi : d he Kingdom of God on earth con¬
sists in this that all men should be at peace with
one another. It was thus that the Hebrew prophets
conceived of the rule of God.” “The [five] com¬
mandments for peace given by Jesus proclaimed
the Kingdom of God on earth.”
Weiss: The Kingdom of God is “a Kingdom in
which the Will of God is fulfilled as perfectly upon
earth as by the angels in heaven.”
Wendt: “The general idea of the Kingdom of
God is the idea of a Divine dispensation under
which God would bestow His full salvation upon a
society of men, who, on their part, should fulfil His
Will in true righteousness.”
Westcott : 1 The Kingdom of God is at once
spiritual and historical; eternal and temporal; out¬
ward and inward ; visible and invisible ; a system
and an energy. It is an order of things in which
heavenly laws are recognized and obeyed. It de¬
pends both for its origin and for its support upon
forces which are not of the earth. It is inspired by
the principles and powers of a higher sphere. It
implies a harmonious relation between men and
HOW LATER THINKERS PUT IT.
79
beings of the unseen universe. It places its members
in a social and personal relationship to a Divine
Head, as citizens to a King, as children to a Father.”
Edwin Arnold:
“ The Kingdom . . .
... a new established State,
Greater than States and governing all States :
Which should not have for boundaries the seas,
Mountains or streams, nor any border line
By bloody swordpoint traced ; and should not have
Armies nor tributes, treasuries nor crowns,
But, overleaping races, realms and tongues,
Thrones, zones and dominations, lands and seas,
Should clasp in one mild confine all those hearts
Which seek and love the Light and had the Light
Shining from secret Heaven, by Him revealed
First-born of Heaven, first Soul of Human Souls
That touched the top of Manhood and—from height
Of godlike, pure Humanity—reached God.
To this end was He sent, for this made known
Life beyond death, Love manifest through Law,
And God no name, no angry judge, no “ Jah”
But Spirit, worshipped in the spirit : One
With His sweet Spirit, and with ours, through His ;
Unseen, unspeakable, not to be known
By searching; being beyond all sight, speech,
search ;
But Lord and Lover of all living things,
King of the Kingdom ! n
APPENDIX II.
THE WITNESS OF IMPERIAL HISTORY
to the Kingdom of God.
Young men and women as well as older people are
greatly helped in their faith if they can be made to feel
that the Kingdom of God not merely concerns the inner
life of the heart, but governs also the obvious and
palpable drift of universal history. And in these
democratic days, when every one is bound to take more
or less interest in things governmental, the witness
afforded by the succession of the great world empires,
with their modern continuators, may be found especially
helpful. At a time, too, when men’s notions of the
relations between prediction and fulfilment are being
readjusted, it is well to show that, in the light of modern
knowledge, the great “Argument from prophecy” has
lost none of its cogency. To many, indeed, it has
seemed only to gain by the change it has undergone.
The correspondence between the hope of Israel and the
broad sweep of human history is more impressive than
any number of coincidences in minor details. It is also
desirable that this study of the evangelic idea of the
Kingdom of God should not close without giving
members of the Class a sort of pocket-survey of that
imperial progress which is to issue in the Christianising
of the whole world.
§§ 7 > 2 6, 46, 55 > 63, and 94 should first be read once
more. The Key Text of the last section, as the Christian
formula of the entire course of imperial history, supplies
us with our theme.
The Kingdom of the world is become the Kingdom
of our Lord and of His Christ , and He shall
reign for ever and ever. —Rev. xi. 15.
THE WITNESS OF IMPERIAL HISTORY. 81
The Kingdom of the world. Not, as you have it
in the Authorized Version, the Kingdoms of the
world. Not a scattered multiplicity, but a compact
unity.
Think for a moment of the grandeur of that con¬
ception—the Kingdom of the world. The world
one Kingdom. The world in its immensity and
diversity ; its “ ocean-sundered continents,” its wide
waste of waters,” its islands, its rivers, its heights,
and its depths—all gathered into one empire, all
shelteied beneath one flag. The world, with its
variety of race and colour and tongue, with its
differing grades of civilization, with its myriad forms
of government, with its multitude of religions,—
reduced to the unity of a single realm, united under
one head, maae obedient to one law, compacted so
as to embody one will,—few sublimer ideas than
this have emerged within the horizon of the human
mind.
Who first conceived it ?
What soul was it, in the dim, grey dawn of
human history, which first caught the germ of the
idea ? What chieftain, flushed with victory, rallying
round him his booty-laden warriors, cried, smitten
with the sudden thought, “ Shall I not go forth from
conquering to conquer, and to conquer without end?
Shall I not, with the help of the gods, beat down
the tubes in the next valley also—and in the next_
and in the next until there be no more left to
plunder or to kill ? And my word shall be law as
far as foot of farthest traveller has trod ! ”
We cannot tell when this idea of World-Empire
was born. Straining our eyes backward toward
3 F
82
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
the mists that cover the borders of the historic
and prehistoric periods, we can dimly discern
the great conception already established, con¬
sciously or unconsciously ruling the minds of kings
and nations. True, the world known to them was
small and narrow ; but it was their world : and the
ambition to bring it under one sway was the same
in essence as the latest and widest imperialism.
Yet see how the idea has grown and asserted
itself in ever broader and grander reality !
The first known seats of world-empire are found
in the first known centres of civilization. The story
of civilized man is traced back with more or less
certainty to the peoples that dwelt in the valleys of
the Tigris and Euphrates on the east, and in the
valley of the Nile on the west. From these valleys
sprang the powers which contended through many
ages for the mastery of the world. Even if Egypt
did derive from the land of the Two Rivers the rudi¬
ments of her massive civilization, yet to Egypt has
been ascribed the historic commencement of the
quest after universal sovereignty. But the researches
and discoveries of Oriental scholars seem every
year to carry the light of science further back into
those once shadowy regions of the past ; and the
new knowledge, not less than the old ignorance, bids
us beware of attempting to fix precisely historic
starting-points. Nevertheless, the facts laid bare
touching a period some fifteen centuries B.c.
show us the Pharaoh at that distant date already
grasping after the Kingdom of the world. The
sombre magnificence of colossal masonry attests to
this day the splendour of his imperial capital. The
THE WITNESS OF IMPERIAL HISTORY. 83
might of his arms had extended Egyptian supremacy
as far as the river Euphrates and the borders of
Mesopotamia, and had extorted from the powers
beyond proffers of friendship that were eloquent of
fear. “ For a time all Western Asia did homage to
the Egyptian monarch.”
But only for a time.
Out from the obscure horizon which encircles this
tract of ancient history has loomed forth in recent
years the outline of a great yet still mysterious people.
From the hieroglyphics of ancient Egypt, from
the cuneiform characters of disinterred Nineveh,
from stone inscriptions scattered over the vast area
enclosed between the ^Egean and the Tigris, there
are gathered hints of a great empire of the Hittites.
In the wonderland of their as yet undiscovered arts
and appliances, some theorists claim to find the
springs of all later civilization. Their capital on the
Euphrates ; their home on the country to the north¬
east of Lebanon ; they are alleged to have won a
military supremacy over the infant peoples of Asia
Minor and Mesopotamia. Their rise involved the
relative decline of Egypt.
At a period some fourteen centuries before Christ
—about the time generally assigned to Moses—the
imperial rivals are said to have met in fierce conflict
to the north of Palestine. The power of Egypt
was for the time shattered. Pharaoh was glad to
contract an offensive and defensive alliance with
the northern empire; and for a hundred years the
Hittites may be said, in a sense, to have held the
Kingdom of the world.
But away to the east, on the banks of the
84
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
Tigris, another Power was rising 10 eminence. A
race of hardy hillmen, descending to the plain, had
built themsrlves into cities, which formed the cradle
of the next world-empire, as they had, generations
earlier, been a source of nascent civilization. The
same century which saw Hittite and Egyptian
jointly supreme saw the more marked beginnings
of that career of conquest which, continued through
seven centuries, at last made Assyria mistress of
the ancient world. First the valleys of the Tigris
and Euphrates were overrun. Two centuries later,
the Assyrian arms were victorious from the Medi¬
terranean on the west to the Caspian, and to the
Persian Gulf on the east. Four hundred years
afterwards, in the century of Hosea and Isaiah, a
yet vaster territory owned the sway of Asshur.
But here we mark a change in the career of empire.
It ceased to be a mere series of victorious expedi¬
tions, without permanent and secured results ; it
became the systematic incorporation of provinces
into an organized realm. It is true, the wars of
even the greatest kings were still little else than
marauding enterprises : the record of conquest on
the Assyrian cylinders is chiefly an inventory of
plunder ; but Tiglath-pileser, of Biblical fame, has
the credit of consolidating empire, and organizing
his amorphous realm into regular satrapies or pro¬
vinces, with Assyrian governors. King after king
pushed ever farther the confines of empire, until,
in the middle of the seventh century before Christ,
Assyria stood at the height of her glory, with a
dominion hitherto unrivalled, alike for extent and
power. On the east the troops of Nineveh had
THE WITNESS OF IMPERIAL HISTORY. 85
penetrated as far as the Indus. Northward, she
had extended her sway up to the trackless Cau¬
casus, and from its stubborn mountaineers had
extorted homage. The desert could not stay her
southward march ; Arabia owned her supremacy.
Syria, Phenicia, Palestine fell before her an easy
prey. And at last her great rival, Egypt, was sub¬
dued and broken up into a group of Assyrian pro¬
vinces. Assyria might justly claim to have gained
the Kingdom of the then world.
But the power, which it had taken ages to build,
crumbled to ruin in less than seventy years. To
the south, on the plain of Shinar, lay a kindred
people ; one of the most ancient of peoples ; yet
a people of far higher culture than their Assyrian
brethren ; a people of libraries and schools, de¬
lighting in painting and horticulture, from whose
astronomical records the proud modern world of
science is glad to learn. Babylon is a name
greater in the world’s story than Nineveh. Her
great king, Nebuchadnezzar, has well been called
the Napoleon of the ancient world. By a succession
of swift and brilliant campaigns he brought over
most of what had been Assyrian territory to Chal-
daean sway, made yet further conquests, and in
less than forty years gave Babylon the proud right
to call herself mistress of the world ! The size ot
the city may bring home to our minds some con¬
ception of her greatness. Ancient Greek historians
tell us that Babylon measured 55 or 56 miles in
circumference.
But the sceptre of the East was quickly changing
hands. Within a score of years after Nebuchad-
86
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
nezzar’s death, Cyrus, the Persian, had taken
Babylon, and the Medes and Persians entered on
the growing heritage of empire. For two hundred
years these worshippers of light and purity main¬
tained and extended the old supremacy. They first
brought the impact of world-empire on European
soil. The Persian despots ruled from the Balkans
to the Hindoo Koosh, from the Libyan deserts to
the Caucasus.
Thus the Kingdom of the world was growing
alike in extent and in the worth of its civilization.
It was now to be transferred from Asia to Europe.
It was soon to contain the highest civilization of
antiquity. There was a small group of cities,
peopled by freemen, which beat back the tide of
Persian conquest, even when it was running at full
flood. The Spartans at Thermopylae, the Athenians
at Salamis, as they withstood the onset of the bar¬
baric millions, were saving for sovereignty in a
later age the laws, the literature, the institutions of
Greece. From Nineveh and Egypt, from Babylon
and Phoenicia, the quick-witted Greek had learned
and copied their best in art, in letters, and in
science, and had developed these into the noblest
growths of the ancient world. Alexander the Great
was no more than the military genius who gave
imperial scope to the intellectual ascendancy of
Greece. The Macedonian phalanx, as it rolled
irresistible over the ruins of Persian greatness, from
the Danube to the Himalayas, macadamized a
highway, along which Greek letters and Greek
thought could travel to the farthest confines of the
known world. Alexandria, the capital of later
THE WITNESS OF IMPERIAL HISTORY. 87
classic culture was a fit monument of him who
handed over to Greek civilization the Kingdom of
the world.
The next halting stage in the march of empire
bears on it the name of Rome. Her claim to world-
empire is supreme. The glories of Egypt and
Assyria, of Babylon, of Persia, and of Macedon,
pale before her imperial splendours. The Mediter¬
ranean—the Great Sea of wondering Eastern nations
—became a Roman lake. Think of the area of
territory which lay submissive at the Caesar’s feet.
It stretched from the Irish Sea to the Persian Gulf,
from the Straits of Gibraltar to the sands of Arabia,
from the impenetrable Sahara to the scarcely more
penetrable forests of Germany. And over that vast
region the system of government which prevailed
was the noblest known to antiquity. Greek letters
were superior to Latin ; but nought could vie with
Roman Law. To the codes of Roman jurists the
modern world owes the impulse and the model of
some of its best legislation. The bestowal of the
Roman franchise was a permanent addition to the
dignity of mankind. Under the strong and peaceful
protection of the legionary, the treasures of ancient
culture, its arts, its letters, its philosophies and
sciences, were carried to the remotest provinces.
To Rome in unprecedented measure and merit
belonged the Kingdom of the world.
At the time when her imperial greatness was
about its height there was a lone exile in a small and
rocky island of the ^Egean. He had been driven
into banishment because of his persistent attach-
88
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
ment to what one of the proudest Roman historians
called a deadly superstition. He was the member
of a despised sect, originated by a crucified male¬
factor. The land from which he and his sect had
sprung, had been the battle-ground and sport of
each of the world’s powers in turn, was even now
being ruthlessly subdued by Roman soldiery ; the
rebel race was an object of universal loathing.
This poor convict, driven in upon himself, tries to
console himself by writing. He writes very bad
Greek, broken and ungrammatical; such as would
excite the scorn of any British Grammar-school boy.
He goes on spelling out his dreaming fancies ; for
he is a visionary in his poor superstitious way. So
his gaolers might have thought and spoken.
But mark that sentence he has written ! You
can scarcely credit the audacity which could pen
such words. “The Kingdom of the world”—that
belongs to Rome, you say ;—“ The world was made
for Caesar.” But no, the writing goes on, “The
Kingdom of the world is become the King¬
dom of our Lord and of His Christ ; and He
shall reign for ever and ever !” “ What! your Lord ?”
we can imagine the Roman onlooker crying, “ your
Hebrew Adonai ? Why, we are now ravaging His
Holy Land; and in a year or two we shall destroy
His chosen city and burn down His temple. And
His Christ? Him whom our procurator condemned
to the cross ? They reign for ever ? Surely this is
the last extravagance of fanaticism !”
Marvellous indeed is the assurance of this apoca¬
lyptic seer ; only more marvellous is the way history
has verified it. What has come to pass since he
THE WITNESS OF IMPERIAL HISTOR Y. 89
wrote only supplies the first terms in the series
which these words sum up.
For the Kingdom of the world, as we all know,
did not finally rest with Rome. She, too, succumbed
to the fate which had overtaken all her predecessors.
She perished by luxury within and the sword with¬
out.
Who was her successor in the line of empire ?
At first indeed there seems no possibility of
answer. All seems without form and void. The
great deep of Northern Barbarism is broken up \
and the ancient world disappears under the deluge
of invasion.
But at last a semblance of unity emerges from
the flood of war and dissension. It slowly stiffens
into shape and power, until it becomes the great
reality of the Middle Ages. We find most of the
historic lands of Europe acknowledging one head,
one jurisdiction, one vast and graded system of
government. There are still the fierce diversities
of a dynastic and national kind ; but crowns and
liberties are withheld and bestowed at the dis¬
cretion of the central power. This power summons
to its banner the combined armies of Europe and
visits disobedient nations with terror more dreaded
than pestilence or war. Even the throne which
claims to inherit the traditions of Roman Empire
must own the supremacy of Caesar’s mightier suc¬
cessor ; and Europe’s strongest monarch is igno-
miniously defeated when he seeks to claim an equal
lace.
We find in short the Kingdom of the world set
up anew. It has belonged successively, in higher,
90
THE KINGDOM OF GOD .
broader form, to Egypt, to Assyria, to Babylon, to
Persia, to Macedon, to Rome ; what is this latest
imperial unity ?
It is Christendom, i.e. y the Kingdom of the
Christ.
This is no theorizing. It is fact. After the Roman
Empire, the next organic combination of what are
called the world-historic peoples is Christendom.
The Middle Ages present an imposing outward
fulfilment of the seer’s vision. The Church, with
its tight grip on every form of life, individual and
social, bound Europe together in a far closer unity
and more genuine subjection than many of the pre¬
ceding empires knew. The Kingdom of the world
did become in a pictorial political way the Kingdom
of our Lord and of His Christ.
Only outwardly however. The Pope was no true
Vicar of Christ. That fair seeming picture was
destroyed by the Great Schism and the Reformation.
But the outward unity was broken only that the
inward might grow.
Christendom to-day is a greater fact than ever
before; a greater unity in manners, laws, life.
This illustrates itself pictorially still. You may
see our Queen, head of the empire on which the sun
never sets, kneel in lowly obeisance in the shrine of
the crucified Nazarene, whom she recognises as her
King supreme. Or glance within the village
church and see the statesman, who directs the
destinies of our world-embracing dominion, humbly
bend the head as he prays in the name of Jesus.
See the young German Kaiser as he acts chap¬
lain to his crew and avows his loyalty to the
THE WITNESS OF IMPERIAL HISTOR Y. 91
Evangelical religion which is the creation of the
Christ ; or amid the gorgeous Oriental display of
Moscow see the Tzar of all the Russias receive his
crown from the hands of a priest of Christ; see
him thereby acknowledge himself a vassal of the
Son of Man. Or in forms of worship more simple
and severe, see President after President of the vast
Western Republic avow his fealty to our Lord.
The rulers of America, of the British, German,
Russian empires, proclaim themselves viceroys
of the Christ. Do their territories not constitute
a realm beside which the grandest empires of an¬
tiquity sink into insignificance ?
Look away from these showy externals to the more
serious facts. The earth is more and more passing
into the possession of the nations of Christendom.
Christendom includes all Europe—except one
rapidly vanishing nation. Christendom practically
includes all North and South America. Christen¬
dom is appropriating, colonizing, developing the
Australian continent, the islands of the sea, the
vast mainland of Africa. Christendom rules the
immensely greater part of Asia. The Chinese Em¬
pire is the only great power which is not at least
professedly Christian.
Extensively Christendom soon promises to ab¬
sorb the globe. The means of absorption are
often most unchristian ; but the fact remains : the
dominant, imperial civilization is the civilization of
those peoples who have been most imbued with
Christian influences.
Intensively I will venture to say Christendom is
becoming more and more the dominion of Christ,
92
THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
When we compare our modern life and all its un¬
told horrors with the pure ideal of the Son of Man,
we may shrink in pain from the thought of calling
the civilization of to-day Christian. But when we
compare the present with the past, we note the
humane tendencies of things, and venture once more
to call ourselves Christian.
For mark ! in these Christian countries, the
standard of morals, the ideal of perfection, is, how¬
ever glaringly unobserved, borrowed from the New
Testament. Children are taught at school, and in
the home, the stories of Christ’s love ; and imbibe
as regulative the principles of the Gospel. Modern
life is ever more and more imbued with the moral
teaching of the Son of Man. Even the best ideals
of social life, which have in them most propul¬
sive force, are copies, more or less imperfect, of
the Kingdom of God which Jesus came to proclaim.
His principles, however inadequately recognised,
are in the ascendant. They are slowly realizing
themselves in all spheres where they are known.
Alike in extent and in intensity the Kingdom of the
world is and is becoming the Kingdom of our
Christ. There is no realm that can vie with it one
moment. If Kingdom of the world there be, even
now that Kingdom is Christ’s.
The Vision of Daniel was a true glimpse of the
future. The brutal kingdoms of rapine and violence
have sunk one after the other before the rising King¬
dom of a Son of Man which has no bounds nor end.
There is a poetic significance in the fact that the last
relic of imperial Rome—the Holy Roman Empire—
was put an end to by the French Revolution. Then
THE WITNESS OF IMPERIAL HISTORY. 93
Humanity, as opposed to royalty or nobility or
clergy, claimed to come to its political rights.
The Kingdom of Humanity, which is the Kingdom
of the Son of Man, in a sense succeeded im¬
mediately on the demise of the last empire of viol¬
ence. Man as man now sways the sceptre of political
power : man as man obedient to the Son of Man
realizes the Apocalyptic Vision. The voices of
heaven are being echoed in the events of earth.
The Kingdom of the world is become the Kingdom
of our Lord and of His Christ.
This review of facts ought to induce in every
Christian something of an imperial consciousness.
We ought not to work as men timorously applying
a dying faith to the unsatisfied needs of living men,
tremulously hoping the light may not go quite out
before our work is done. We ought to fight as men
absolutely certain of victory, as heirs to an imperial
destiny. The Kingdom of God is coming, coming
certainly, ever nearer its inevitable realization. The
stream of human affairs flows with ever fuller flood
in that direction. We have watched the suc¬
cession of empires. We have seen one follow the
other, each as a rule containing a broader, nobler,
humaner life. Then we have seen proclaimed the
empire of the Son of Man, the kingdom of humanity,
of liberty, justice, purity, love. We have seen it
very imperfectly expressed in Christendom : yet
even that imperfect expression we have watched
expand into the noblest and strongest civilization
the world has known. We have seen the hidden
leaven of the Christ-Spirit working to bring about
sweeter manners, purer laws, to promote brother-
94 THE KINGDOM OF GOD.
hood and unity, to subject to itself the varied
departments of our modern life.
Whither does all this tend ? Is there no purpose
in it, or is history a lie springing from chance and
ending in vacuity ?
Nay, that we cannot believe. The voice of history
repeats the voice of prophecy :
“ Unto us a child is born, unto us a Son is given,
and the government shall be upon his shoulder.
Of the increase of his government there shall be no
end.” “ There came one like unto a Son of Man,
ind there was given him dominion and glory
and a kingdom, that all the peoples, nations, and
languages should serve him : his dominion is an
everlasting dominion, which shall not pass away,
and his kingdom that which shall not be destroyed.”
“ The Kingdom of the World is become the King¬
dom of our Lord and of His Christ, and He shall
reign for ever and ever.”
Let us then, with the proud consciousness that
the drift of the ages is with us, seek to realize the
Will of Christ our King in every sphere of the
world’s life. Let us maintain His supremacy in our
own hearts, in the home, in the Church, in the
State : let us make every interest, social, economic,
political, subordinate to His sway. But let us never
forget the words of our Master, wherein He the
King of kings and Lord of lords taught us the
secret of true sovereignty :—
Blessed are the meek, for they shall inherit the earth.
Blessed are the poor in spirit, for theirs is the Kingdom
of Heaven.
TURNBULL AND SPEARS, PRINTERS, EDINBURGH.
Third Edition, in Grown 8uo, Price 8s. 6d.
BEYOND THE STARS;
OB,
Its Inhabitants, Occupations, and Life.
By THOMAS HAMILTON, D.D., Belfast,
Author of “History of the Irish Presbyterian Church.”
CONTENTS.— Chap. I. Some Introductory Words. II. A Settling
of Localities. III. The King of the Country. IV. The King’s
Ministers. V. The King’s Messengers. VI. The King’s Sub-
jects. VII. The Little Ones in Heaven. VIII. Do they know
one another in Heaven ? IX. Common Objections to the
Doctrine of Recognition in Heaven. X. Between Death and the
Resurrection. XI. Howto get there.
“ It is the work of a man of strong sense and great power, of lucid
thought and expression. ... He puts himself in touch with his
audience, and arranges what he has to say in the clearest manner.’’
British Weekly.
“ Dr Hamilton accepts the clear revelations of Scripture, gathers
together its limits, and endeavours to point out their indisputable
teaching. He has produced a wise, consolatory, and altogether help¬
ful volume .—Baptist Magazine.
In cloth binding , red edges , price Is.
SO GREAT SALVATION.
Bv the late Rev. G. H. C. MACGREGOR, M.A.,
WITH
Introduction by the BISHOP OF DURHAM.
“ If I have read it aright, there is indeed reason why I should be
glad. It is one of those books, never too common, in which, by the
grace of God, the message of a full gospel is presented not only
clearly, but sympathetically ; not only tenderly, but searcliingly;
and above all, so as to bring out proportions and connections in
the ‘ things which accompany salvation,’ as they are revealed in the
Holy Word.” —Bishop of Durham.
T. & T. CLARK, 38 George Street, EDINBURGH.